[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

US20150191727A1 - Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs - Google Patents

Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20150191727A1
US20150191727A1 US14/662,061 US201514662061A US2015191727A1 US 20150191727 A1 US20150191727 A1 US 20150191727A1 US 201514662061 A US201514662061 A US 201514662061A US 2015191727 A1 US2015191727 A1 US 2015191727A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
substituted
alkyl
group
bicyclic nucleoside
independently
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US14/662,061
Inventor
Michael T. Migawa
Punit P. Seth
Eric E. Swayze
Bruce S. Ross
Quanlai Song
Mingming Han
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to US14/662,061 priority Critical patent/US20150191727A1/en
Publication of US20150191727A1 publication Critical patent/US20150191727A1/en
Assigned to IONIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. reassignment IONIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC. CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: ISIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC.
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/11DNA or RNA fragments; Modified forms thereof; Non-coding nucleic acids having a biological activity
    • C12N15/113Non-coding nucleic acids modulating the expression of genes, e.g. antisense oligonucleotides; Antisense DNA or RNA; Triplex- forming oligonucleotides; Catalytic nucleic acids, e.g. ribozymes; Nucleic acids used in co-suppression or gene silencing
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/06Pyrimidine radicals
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H19/00Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof
    • C07H19/02Compounds containing a hetero ring sharing one ring hetero atom with a saccharide radical; Nucleosides; Mononucleotides; Anhydro-derivatives thereof sharing nitrogen
    • C07H19/04Heterocyclic radicals containing only nitrogen atoms as ring hetero atom
    • C07H19/16Purine radicals
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07HSUGARS; DERIVATIVES THEREOF; NUCLEOSIDES; NUCLEOTIDES; NUCLEIC ACIDS
    • C07H21/00Compounds containing two or more mononucleotide units having separate phosphate or polyphosphate groups linked by saccharide radicals of nucleoside groups, e.g. nucleic acids

Definitions

  • novel bicyclic nucleoside analogs and oligomeric compounds and compositions prepared therefrom are provided wherein the naturally occurring pentofuranose ring is replaced with a cyclohexyl ring that comprises one ring heteroatom and a bridge making the ring system bicyclic.
  • the oligomeric compounds and compositions of the present invention are expected to hybridize to a portion of a target RNA resulting in loss of normal function of the target RNA.
  • the oligomeric compounds provided herein are also expected to be useful as primers and probes in diagnostic applications.
  • Antisense technology is an effective means for reducing the expression of one or more specific gene products and can therefore prove to be uniquely useful in a number of therapeutic, diagnostic, and research applications.
  • Chemically modified nucleosides are routinely used for incorporation into antisense sequences to enhance one or more properties such as for example nuclease resistance.
  • One such group of chemical modifications includes bicyclic nucleosides wherein the furanose portion of the nucleoside includes a bridge connecting two atoms on the furanose ring thereby forming a bicyclic ring system.
  • Such bicyclic nucleosides have various names including BNA's and LNA's for bicyclic nucleic acids or locked nucleic acids respectively.
  • BNA's are toxic. See, e.g., Swayze, E. E.; Siwkowski, A. M.; Wancewicz, E. V.; Migawa, M. T.; Wyrzykiewicz, T. K.; Hung, G.; Monia, B. P.; Bennett, C. F., Antisense oligonucleotides containing locked nucleic acid improve potency but cause significant hepatotoxicity in animals. Nucl. Acids Res., doi: 10.1093/nar/gkl1071 (December 2006, advanced online publication).
  • nucleosides comprising 2′ modifications, nucleosides comprising 5′ modifications, and nucleosides utilizing non-natural bases.
  • Anhydrohexitol nucleic acids have been prepared (but not as the bicyclic analog, see Wouters and Herdewijn, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1999, 9, 1563-1566).
  • bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acids and antisense compounds prepared therefrom useful for modulating gene expression pathways including those relying on mechanisms of action such as RNaseH, RNAi and dsRNA enzymes, as well as other antisense mechanisms based on target degradation or target occupancy.
  • the bicyclic nucleoside analogs provided herein have a core structure comprising a cyclohexyl ring wherein one of the ring carbons is replaced with a heteroatom.
  • the cyclohexyl core also includes a bridge connecting two of the ring carbon atoms wherein the two bridging ring carbon atoms have at least one ring carbon atom separating them.
  • the oligomeric compounds are expected to hybridize to a portion of a target RNA resulting in loss of normal function of the target RNA.
  • the oligomeric compounds are also expected to be useful as primers and probes in diagnostic applications.
  • bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided herein having formula I:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety
  • Z is O or S
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R 1 ), C(R 1 )(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ C(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ N, C( ⁇ NR 1 ), Si(R 1 ) 2 , S(O) 2 , S(O), C( ⁇ O) and C( ⁇ S);
  • each R 1 and R 2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ 1 NJ 1 J 2 , SJ 1 N 3 , COOJ 1 , acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S( ⁇ O) 2 -J 1 or S( ⁇ O)-J 1 ;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • E 1 and E 2 is H and the other of E 1 and E 2 is O-T 2 or one of E 3 and E 4 is H and the other of E 3 and E 4 is O-T 2 and the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, OJ 3 , NJ 3 J 4 , SJ 3 , N 3 , COOJ 3 , acyl (C
  • T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety and the other of T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group;
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl or C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl.
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl or C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl.
  • L is O, S or NJ 7 ;
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, or C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl.
  • Bx is uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • Z is O
  • one of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is OT 2 and the remaining three of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are H.
  • one of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is OT 2
  • one of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is H and the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are, independently, halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • one of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is OT 2 , two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are H and the remaining one of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, the remaining of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is, independently, fluoro, methyl or substituted methyl.
  • L 1 and L 2 are each H. In certain embodiments, one of L 1 and L 2 is H and the other of L 1 and L 2 is other than H. In certain embodiments, L 1 and L 2 are each other than H. In certain embodiments, one of L 1 and L 2 is substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, the substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from halogen, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, OJ 5 , NJ 5 J 6 and CN, wherein each J 5 and J 6 is, independently, H or C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • the substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from fluoro and OCH 3 .
  • at least one of L 1 and L 2 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • one of L 1 and L 2 is methyl.
  • T 1 is selected from acetyl, benzyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl and dimethoxytrityl. In certain embodiments, T 1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl. In certain embodiments, T 1 is a phosphorus moiety. In certain embodiments, T 2 is a reactive phosphorus group. In certain embodiments, T 2 is a reactive phosphorus group selected from diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite and H-phosphonate. In certain embodiments, T 1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl and T 2 is diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite.
  • Q comprises from 2 to 4 of the linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, Q comprises 2 or 3 of the linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, Q comprises 1 of the biradical groups. In certain embodiments, Q is C(R 1 )(R 2 ), C(R 1 )(R 2 )—C(R 1 )(R 2 ) or O—C(R 1 )(R 2 ). In certain embodiments, Q is CH 2 , (CH 2 ) 2 or O—CH 2 . In certain embodiments, Q is 2′-O—CH 2 -5′.
  • Q is 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —S-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —N(R 5 )-2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 3 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 —C
  • each R 3 and R 4 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R 5 is H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl or substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl;
  • E 1 and E 2 is H and the other of E 1 and E 2 is O-T 2 or one of E 3 and E 4 is H and the other of E 3 and E 4 is O-T 2 and the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group selected from a phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, phosphate triester and a phosphorus containing chiral auxiliary and the other of T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety having the formula:
  • R a and R c are each, independently, OH, SH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
  • R b is O or S
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl.
  • the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein Bx is uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are each H. In certain embodiments, one of the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is H and the other one of the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is CH 3 , CH 2 CH 3 , OCH 3 or F.
  • L 1 and L 2 are each H.
  • one of L 1 and L 2 is H and the other of L 1 and L 2 is CH 3 or OCH 3 .
  • T 1 is a phosphorus moiety.
  • T 1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl.
  • T 2 is diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite.
  • T 1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl and T 2 is diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite.
  • the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein Q is 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O-2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O—N(R 5 )-2′ or 5′-CR 3 R 4 —N(R 5 )—O-2′.
  • Q is 5′-CH 2 —O-2′.
  • bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I having the configuration:
  • bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I having the configuration:
  • bicyclic nucleoside analogs wherein one of E 1 and E 2 is H and the other of E 1 and E 2 is O-T 2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • bicyclic nucleoside analogs wherein one of E 1 and E 2 is H and the other of E 1 and E 2 is O-T 2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • bicyclic nucleoside analogs wherein one of E 3 and E 4 is H and the other of E 3 and E 4 is O-T 2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • bicyclic nucleoside analogs wherein one of E 3 and E 4 is H and the other of E 3 and E 4 is O-T 2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds that each comprise at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety
  • Z is O or S
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R 1 ), C(R 1 )(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ C(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ N, C( ⁇ NR 1 ), Si(R 1 ) 2 , S(O) 2 , S(O), C( ⁇ O) and C( ⁇ S);
  • each R 1 and R 2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ 1 NJ 1 H 2 , SJ 1 N 3 , COOJ 1 , acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S( ⁇ O) 2 -J 1 or S( ⁇ O)-J 1 ;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • E 5 and E 6 is H and the other of E 5 and E 6 is O-T 4 or one of E 7 and E 8 is H and the other of E 7 and E 8 is O-T 4 and the remaining two of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, OJ 3 , NJ 3 J 4 , SJ 3 , N 3 , COOJ 3 , acyl (C
  • T 3 and T 4 is an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound and the other of T 3 and T 4 is H, a protecting group, a phosphorus moiety, a 5′ or 3′-terminal group or an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound;
  • L is O, S or NJ 7 ;
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl or C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl.
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl or C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl.
  • L is O, S or NJ 7 ;
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, or C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II, Bx is uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Z is O.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 is OT 4 and the remaining three of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 is OT 4 , one of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 is H and the remaining two of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are, independently, halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 is OT 4 , two of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are H and the remaining one of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 is halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the remaining of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 is, independently, fluoro, methyl or substituted methyl.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II L 1 and L 2 are each H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L 1 and L 2 is H and the other of L 1 and L 2 is other than H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II L 1 and L 2 are each other than H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L 1 and L 2 is substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from halogen, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, OJ 5 , NJ 5 J 6 and CN, wherein each J 5 and J 6 is, independently, H or C 1 -C 6 alkyl.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from fluoro and OCH 3 .
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II at least one of L 1 and L 2 is C 1 -C 6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L 1 and L 2 is methyl.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein at least one of T 3 and T 4 is a 5′ or 3′-terminal group. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein one T 3 is a phosphorus moiety. In certain embodiments, the phosphorus moiety has the formula:
  • R 8 is O or S.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein one T 3 is H and one T 4 is H.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q comprises from 2 to 4 of said linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q comprises 2 or 3 of said linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q comprises 1 of said biradical groups.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is C(R 1 )(R 2 ), C(R 1 )(R 2 )—C(R 1 )(R 2 ) or O—C(R 1 )(R 2 ). In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is CH 2 , (CH 2 ) 2 or O—CH 2 . In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is 2′-O—CH 2 -5′.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Q is 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —S-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —N(R 5 )-2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 3 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 —C
  • each R 3 and R 4 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R 5 is H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl or substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl;
  • E 5 and E 6 is H and the other of E 5 and E 6 is O-T 4 or one of E 7 and E 8 is H and the other of E 7 and E 8 is O-T 4 and the remaining two of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen; and
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl.
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Bx uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Z is O.
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the remaining two of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are each H for each bicyclic nucleoside of formula II. In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is H and the other one of the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 is CH 3 , CH 2 CH 3 , OCH 3 or F.
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II L 1 and L 2 are each H.
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L 1 and L 2 is H and the other of L 1 and L 2 is CH 3 or OCH 3 .
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein one T 3 is a phosphorus moiety.
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O-2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O—N(R 5 )-2′ or 5′-CR 3 R 4 —N(R 5 )—O-2′.
  • the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is 5′-CH 2 —O-2′.
  • each of the further oligomeric compounds are provided comprising one phosphorus moiety having the formula:
  • R 8 is O or S.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E 5 and E 6 is H and the other of E 5 and E 6 is O-T 4 having the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E 5 and E 6 is H and the other of E 5 and E 6 is O-T 4 having the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E 7 and E 8 is H and the other of E 7 and E 8 is O-T 4 having the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E 7 and E 8 is H and the other of E 7 and E 8 is O-T 4 having the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II is located at the 5′ end.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least one region having at least 2 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II. In certain embodiments, the at least one region comprises from 2 to 5 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least two regions wherein each region independently comprises from 1 to about 5 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II and wherein each region is separated by at least one monomer subunit that is different from the bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II and is independently selected from nucleosides and modified nucleosides.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising a gapped oligomeric compound wherein one region of contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II is located at the 5′-end and a second region of contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of Formula II is located at the 3′-end, wherein the two regions are separated by an internal region comprising from about 6 to about 18 monomer subunits independently selected from nucleosides and modified nucleosides that are different from the bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II.
  • the internal region comprises from about 8 to about 14 contiguous ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribofuranosyl nucleosides.
  • the internal region comprises from about 9 to about 12 contiguous ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribofuranosyl nucleosides.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising one region of from 2 to 3 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II, an optional second region of from 1 to 3 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II and a third region of from 8 to 14 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribofuranosyl nucleosides wherein said third region is located between said first and said second regions.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided wherein each internucleoside linking group is, independently, a phosphodiester internucleoside linking group or a phosphorothioate internucleoside linking group. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein essentially each internucleoside linking group is a phosphorothioate internucleoside linking group.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 8 to about 40 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 8 to about 20 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 10 to about 16 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 0 to about 14 monomer subunits in length.
  • each bicyclic nucleoside analog comprises a 6 membered ring having 5 carbon atoms and one heteroatom selected from oxygen, sulfur or substituted amino, wherein a first ring carbon flanking the ring heteroatom is substituted with a nucleobase and the opposite flanking ring carbon is substituted with a first group that can form an internucleoside linkage; one additional ring carbon is substituted with a second group that can form an internucleoside linkage; and wherein said 6 membered ring comprises a bridge connecting two ring carbon atoms of said six membered ring wherein the two ring atoms are separated by at least one additional ring atom.
  • each of the groups that can form an internucleoside linkage is, independently, hydroxyl, protected hydroxyl, hydroxymethylene, protected hydroxymethylene or a reactive phosphorus group.
  • the bridge comprises a single atom between said two ring carbons thereby having a 2.2.1. bicyclic ring structure.
  • the bridge comprises two atoms between said two ring carbons thereby having a 2.2.2. bicyclic ring structure.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided comprising at least one of these bicyclic nucleoside analogs.
  • Also provided herein are methods of inhibiting gene expression comprising contacting one or more cells, a tissue or an animal with an oligomeric compound as provided herein.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided herein for use in an in vivo method of inhibiting gene expression said method comprising contacting one or more cells, a tissue or an animal with an oligomeric compound as provided herein.
  • oligomeric compounds as provided herein are used in medical therapy.
  • the bicyclic nucleosides each have a core structure comprising a cyclohexyl ring wherein one of the ring carbons is replaced with a heteroatom. Attached to one of the two carbon atoms flanking the heteroatom is a heterocyclic base moiety and attached to the other flanking carbon atom is a first group capable of forming an internucleoside linkage. A second group capable of forming an internucleoside linkage is adjacent to or one atom removed from the first group capable of forming an internucleoside linkage.
  • the core six membered ring system further comprises a bridge connecting two of the ring carbon atoms wherein the two bridging ring carbon atoms have at least one ring carbon atom separating them.
  • the bridge forming the second ring is variable comprising a single biradical group such as for example a methylene or substituted methylene group or up to about 8 biradical groups linked together.
  • Biradical groups that can be used individually or linked together to form larger bridging groups include, but are not limited to: O, S, N(R 1 ), C(R 1 )(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ C(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ N, C( ⁇ NR 1 ), Si(R 1 ) 2 , SO 2 , SO, C( ⁇ O) and C( ⁇ S) where R 1 and R 2 are as listed above.
  • the conformation ( ⁇ or ⁇ ) of the bicyclic nucleosides can also be varied by choosing the route of synthesis to place the bridge above the plane of the 6 membered ring system or below it.
  • the groups capable of forming internucleoside linkages can be variable.
  • Preferred groups capable of forming internucleoside linkages include optionally protected primary and secondary alcohols and reactive phosphorus groups such as phosphoramidites and H-phosphonates.
  • one of the groups capable of forming an internucleoside linkage is an optionally protected hydroxymethylene and the other group is an optionally protected hydroxyl or reactive phosphorus group.
  • the bicyclic nucleosides are expected to be useful for enhancing desired properties of oligomeric compounds in which they are incorporated such as for example nuclease resistance.
  • the oligomeric compounds provided herein are expected to hybridize to a portion of a target RNA resulting in loss of normal function of the target RNA.
  • the oligomeric compounds provided herein are also expected to be useful as primers and probes in diagnostic applications.
  • bicyclic nucleosides of the present invention have formula I shown below:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety
  • Z is O or S
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R 1 ), C(R 1 )(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ C(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ N, C( ⁇ NR 1 ), Si(R 1 ) 2 , S(O) 2 , S(O), C( ⁇ O) and C( ⁇ S);
  • each R 1 and R 2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ 1 NJ 1 J 2 , SJ 1 N 3 , COOJ 1 , acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S( ⁇ O) 2 J 1 or S( ⁇ O)-J 1 ;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • E 1 and E 2 is H and the other of E 1 and E 2 is O-T 2 or one of E 3 and E 4 is H and the other of E 3 and E 4 is O-T 2 and the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, OJ 3 , NJ 3 J 4 , SJ 3 , N 3 , COOJ 3 , acyl (C
  • T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety and the other of T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group;
  • L is O, S or NJ 7 ;
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl or C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl.
  • Q is 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —S-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —N(R 5 )-2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 3 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 —C
  • each R 3 and R 4 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R 5 is H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl or substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl;
  • E 1 and E 2 is H and the other of E 1 and E 2 is O-T 2 or one of E 3 and E 4 is H and the other of E 3 and E 4 is O-T 2 and the remaining two of E 1 , E 2 , E 3 and E 4 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group selected from a phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, phosphate triester and a phosphorus containing chiral auxiliary and the other of T 1 and T 2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety having the formula:
  • R a and R c are each, independently, OH, SH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
  • R b is O or S
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety
  • Z is O or S
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R 1 ), C(R 1 )(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ C(R 2 ), C(R 1 ) ⁇ N, C( ⁇ NR 1 ), Si(R 1 ) 2 , S(O) 2 , S(O), C( ⁇ O) and C( ⁇ S);
  • each R 1 and R 2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ 1 NJ 1 J 2 , SJ 1 N 3 , COOJ 1 , acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S( ⁇ O) 2 -J 1 or S( ⁇ O)-J 1 ;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, acyl (C( ⁇ O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • E 5 and E 6 is H and the other of E 5 and E 6 is O-T 4 or one of E 7 and E 8 is H and the other of E 7 and E 8 is O-T 4 and the remaining two of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl, substituted C 5 -C 20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, substituted C 5 -C 7 alicyclic radical, OJ 3 , NJ 3 J 4 , SJ 3 , N 3 , COOJ 3 , acyl (C
  • T 3 and T 4 is an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound and the other of T 3 and T 4 is H, a protecting group, a phosphorus moiety, a 5′ or 3′-terminal group or an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound;
  • L is O, S or NJ 7 ;
  • each J 1 , J 2 , J 3 , J 4 , J 5 , J 6 and J 7 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 12 alkenyl, C 2 -C 12 alkynyl, C 5 -C 20 aryl or C 1 -C 12 aminoalkyl.
  • further oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Q is 5′-CR 3 R 4 —O-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —S-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —N(R 5 )-2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 3 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )-2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-CR 3 ⁇ CR 4 —CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 -2′, 5′-CR 3 R 4 —C( ⁇ CR 3 R 4 )—CR 3 R 4 -2′, 5′-(CR 3 R 4 ) 2 —C
  • each R 3 and R 4 is, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R 5 is H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy;
  • L 1 and L 2 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl or substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl;
  • E 5 and E 6 is H and the other of E 5 and E 6 is O-T 4 or one of E 7 and E 8 is H and the other of E 7 and E 8 is O-T 4 and the remaining two of E 5 , E 6 , E 7 and E 8 are each, independently, H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or halogen; and
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C 1 -C 6 aminoalkyl.
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • incorporación of one or more of the bicyclic nucleosides, as provided herein, into an oligomeric compound is expected to enhance one or more desired properties of the resulting oligomeric compound.
  • properties include without limitation stability, nuclease resistance, binding affinity, specificity, absorption, cellular distribution, cellular uptake, charge, clearance and pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics in general.
  • the bicyclic nucleosides provided herein are incorporated into oligomeric compounds such that a motif results.
  • the placement of bicyclic nucleosides into oligomeric compounds to provide particular motifs can enhance the desired properties of the resulting oligomeric compounds for activity using a particular mechanism such as RNaseH or RNAi.
  • Such motifs include without limitation, gapped motifs, hemimer motifs, blockmer motifs, uniformly fully modified motifs, positionally modified motifs and alternating motifs.
  • a wide variety of internucleoside linkages can also be used including but not limited to phosphodiester and phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages which can be incorporated uniformly or in various combinations.
  • the oligomeric compounds can further include at least one 5′ or 3′ terminal group such as for example a conjugate or reporter group.
  • the positioning of the bicyclic nucleosides provided herein, the use of linkage strategies and 5′ or 3′ terminal groups can be easily optimized to enhance a desired activity for a selected target.
  • the term “motif” refers to the pattern created by the relative positioning of monomer subunits within an oligomeric compound wherein the pattern is determined by comparing the sugar groups.
  • the only determinant for the motif of an oligomeric compound is the differences or lack of differences between the sugar groups.
  • the internucleoside linkage, heterocyclic base and further groups such as terminal groups are not considered when determining the motif of an oligomeric compound.
  • sugar group as it applies to motifs includes naturally occurring sugars having a furanose ring, sugars having a modified furanose ring and sugar surrogates wherein the furanose ring has been replaced with another ring system such as for example a morpholino or hexitol ring system.
  • the motif is termed uniformly fully modified.
  • the motif is defined by the pattern created from the positioning of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group relative to the positioning of monomer subunits having different types of sugar groups within an oligomeric compound.
  • Illustrative examples of some different types of sugar groups useful in the preparation of oligomeric compounds having motifs include without limitation, ⁇ -D-ribose, ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribose, substituted sugars (such as 2′, 5′ and bis substituted sugars), 4′-S-sugars (such as 4′-S-ribose, 4′-S-2′-deoxyribose and 4′-S-2′-substituted ribose), bicyclic modified sugars (such as the 2′-O—CH 2 -4′ or 2′-O—(CH 2 ) 2 -4′ bridged ribose derived bicyclic sugars) and sugar surrogates (such as when the ribose ring has been replaced with a morpholino or a hexitol ring system).
  • substituted sugars such as 2′, 5′ and bis substituted sugars
  • 4′-S-sugars such as 4′-S-rib
  • heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage used at each position is variable and is not a factor in determining the motif.
  • the presence of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups is also not a factor in determining the motif
  • alternating motif refers to a an oligomeric compound comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits wherein the monomer subunits have two different types of sugar groups that alternate for essentially the entire sequence of the oligomeric compound.
  • Oligomeric compounds having an alternating motif can be described by the formula: 5′-A(-L-B-L-A) n (-L-B) nn -3′ where A and B are monomer subunits that have different sugar groups, each L is, independently, an internucleoside linking group, n is from about 4 to about 12 and nn is 0 or 1.
  • the heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position.
  • the motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups. This permits alternating oligomeric compounds from about 9 to about 26 monomer subunits in length. This length range is not meant to be limiting as longer and shorter oligomeric compounds are also amenable to oligomeric compounds provided herein.
  • each A or each B comprise bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein.
  • the term “uniformly fully modified motif” refers to an oligomeric compound comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits that each have the same type of sugar group.
  • the heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position.
  • the motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups.
  • the uniformly fully modified motif includes a contiguous sequence of bicyclic nucleosides.
  • one or both of the 5′ and 3′-ends of the contiguous sequence of bicyclic nucleosides comprise 5′ or 3′-terminal groups such as one or more unmodified nucleosides.
  • hemimer motif refers to an oligomeric compound comprising a contiguous sequence of monomer subunits that each have the same type of sugar group with a further short contiguous sequence of monomer subunits located at the 5′ or the 3′ end that have a different type of sugar group.
  • the heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position.
  • the motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups.
  • a hemimer is an oligomeric compound of uniform sugar groups further comprising a short region (1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomer subunits) having uniform but different sugar groups located on either the 3′ or the 5′ end of the oligomeric compound.
  • the hemimer motif comprises a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 28 monomer subunits having one type of sugar group with from 1 to 5 or from 2 to about 5 monomer subunits having a second type of sugar group located at one of the termini.
  • the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-12 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini.
  • the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-5 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini. In certain embodiments, the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 12 to about 18 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini. In certain embodiments, the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 14 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini.
  • blockmer motif and “blockmer” refer to an oligomeric compound comprising an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits wherein the sugar groups of each monomer subunit is the same except for an interrupting internal block of contiguous monomer subunits having a different type of sugar group.
  • the heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position of a blockmer.
  • the motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups.
  • a blockmer overlaps somewhat with a gapmer in the definition but typically only the monomer subunits in the block have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a blockmer and only the monomer subunits in the external regions have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a gapmer with the remainder of monomer subunits in the blockmer or gapmer being ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides or ⁇ -D-ribonucleosides.
  • blockmers are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
  • positionally modified motif is meant to include an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group that is interrupted with two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits having another type of sugar group.
  • Each of the two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits are independently uniformly modified with respect to the type of sugar group.
  • each of the two or more regions have the same type of sugar group.
  • each of the two or more regions have a different type of sugar group.
  • each of the two or more regions independently, have the same or a different type of sugar group.
  • the heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position of a positionally modified oligomeric compound.
  • the motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups.
  • positionally modified oligomeric compounds are provided comprising a sequence of from 8 to 20 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides that further includes two or three regions of from 2 to about 5 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides each.
  • Positionally modified oligomeric compounds are distinguished from gapped motifs, hemimer motifs, blockmer motifs and alternating motifs because the pattern of regional substitution defined by any positional motif does not fit into the definition provided herein for one of these other motifs.
  • the term positionally modified oligomeric compound includes many different specific substitution patterns.
  • the term “gapmer” or “gapped oligomeric compound” refers to an oligomeric compound having two external regions or wings and an internal region or gap.
  • the three regions form a contiguous sequence of monomer subunits with the sugar groups of the external regions being different than the sugar groups of the internal region and wherein the sugar group of each monomer subunit within a particular region is essentially the same.
  • each monomer subunit within a particular region has the same sugar group.
  • the gapmer is a symmetric gapmer and when the sugar group used in the 5′-external region is different from the sugar group used in the 3′-external region, the gapmer is an asymmetric gapmer.
  • the external regions are small (each independently 1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomer subunits) and the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups with the internal region comprising ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
  • the external regions each, independently, comprise from 1 to about 5 monomer subunits having non-naturally occurring sugar groups and the internal region comprises from 6 to 18 unmodified nucleosides.
  • the internal region or the gap generally comprises ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides but can comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
  • the heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position of a gapped oligomeric compound.
  • the motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups.
  • the gapped oligomeric compounds comprise an internal region of ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with one of the external regions comprising bicyclic nucleosides as disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, the gapped oligomeric compounds comprise an internal region of ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with both of the external regions comprising bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
  • gapped oligomeric compounds comprising one or two bicyclic nucleosides at the 5′-end, two or three bicyclic nucleosides at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided comprising one bicyclic nucleoside at the 5′-end, two bicyclic nucleosides at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
  • gapped oligomeric compounds comprising one bicyclic nucleosides at the 5′-end, two bicyclic nucleosides at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 14 ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
  • gapped oligomeric compounds are provided that are from about 10 to about 21 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided that are from about 12 to about 16 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided that are from about 12 to about 14 monomer subunits in length.
  • substituted and substituteduent group are meant to include groups that are typically added to other groups or parent compounds to enhance desired properties or provide other desired effects. Substituent groups can be protected or unprotected and can be added to one available site or to many available sites in a parent compound. Substituent groups may also be further substituted with other substituent groups and may be attached directly or via a linking group such as an alkyl or hydrocarbyl group to a parent compound.
  • Substituent groups amenable herein include without limitation, halogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, acyl (—C(O)R aa ), carboxyl (—C(O)O—R aa ), aliphatic groups, alicyclic groups, alkoxy, substituted oxy (—O—R aa ), aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclic radical, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino (—N(R bb )(R cc )), imino( ⁇ NR bb ), amido (—C(O)N(R bb )(R cc ) or —N(R bb )C(O)R aa ), azido (—N 3 ), nitro (—NO 2 ), cyano (—CN), carbamido (—OC(O)N(R bb )(R cc ) or —N(
  • each R aa , R bb and R cc is, independently, H, an optionally linked chemical functional group or a further substituent group with a preferred list including without limitation, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aliphatic, alkoxy, acyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, alicyclic, heterocyclic and heteroarylalkyl. Selected substituents within the compounds described herein are present to a recursive degree.
  • recursive substituent means that a substituent may recite another instance of itself. Because of the recursive nature of such substituents, theoretically, a large number may be present in any given claim.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry and organic chemistry understands that the total number of such substituents is reasonably limited by the desired properties of the compound intended. Such properties include, by way of example and not limitation, physical properties such as molecular weight, solubility or log P, application properties such as activity against the intended target and practical properties such as ease of synthesis.
  • Recursive substituents are an intended aspect of the invention.
  • One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal and organic chemistry understands the versatility of such substituents.
  • stable compound and “stable structure” as used herein are meant to indicate a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into an efficacious therapeutic agent. Only stable compounds are contemplated herein.
  • alkyl refers to a saturated straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms.
  • alkyl groups include without limitation, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isopropyl, n-hexyl, octyl, decyl, dodecyl and the like.
  • Alkyl groups typically include from 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms (C 1 -C 12 alkyl) with from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred.
  • the term “lower alkyl” as used herein includes from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms.
  • Alkyl groups as used herein may optionally include one or more further substituent groups.
  • alkenyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms and having at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • alkenyl groups include without limitation, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, dienes such as 1,3-butadiene and the like.
  • Alkenyl groups typically include from 2 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 2 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred.
  • Alkenyl groups as used herein may optionally include one or more further substituent groups.
  • alkynyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms and having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl, 1-propynyl, 1-butynyl, and the like.
  • Alkynyl groups typically include from 2 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 2 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred.
  • Alkynyl groups as used herein may optionally include one or more further substituent groups.
  • acyl refers to a radical formed by removal of a hydroxyl group from an organic acid and has the general formula —C(O)—X where X is typically aliphatic, alicyclic or aromatic. Examples include aliphatic carbonyls, aromatic carbonyls, aliphatic sulfonyls, aromatic sulfinyls, aliphatic sulfinyls, aromatic phosphates, aliphatic phosphates and the like. Acyl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • alicyclic refers to a cyclic ring system wherein the ring is aliphatic.
  • the ring system can comprise one or more rings wherein at least one ring is aliphatic.
  • Preferred alicyclics include rings having from about 5 to about 9 carbon atoms in the ring.
  • Alicyclic as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • aliphatic refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms wherein the saturation between any two carbon atoms is a single, double or triple bond.
  • An aliphatic group preferably contains from 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred.
  • the straight or branched chain of an aliphatic group may be interrupted with one or more heteroatoms that include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus.
  • Such aliphatic groups interrupted by heteroatoms include without limitation, polyalkoxys, such as polyalkylene glycols, polyamines, and polyimines. Aliphatic groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • alkoxy refers to a radical formed between an alkyl group and an oxygen atom wherein the oxygen atom is used to attach the alkoxy group to a parent molecule.
  • alkoxy groups include without limitation, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, neopentoxy, n-hexoxy and the like.
  • Alkoxy groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • aminoalkyl refers to an amino substituted C 1 -C 12 alkyl radical.
  • the alkyl portion of the radical forms a covalent bond with a parent molecule.
  • the amino group can be located at any position and the aminoalkyl group can be substituted with a further substituent group at the alkyl and/or amino portions.
  • aralkyl and arylalkyl refer to an aromatic group that is covalently linked to a C 1 -C 12 alkyl radical.
  • the alkyl radical portion of the resulting aralkyl (or arylalkyl) group forms a covalent bond with a parent molecule. Examples include without limitation, benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
  • Aralkyl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups attached to the alkyl, the aryl or both groups that form the radical group.
  • aryl and aromatic refer to a mono- or polycyclic carbocyclic ring system radicals having one or more aromatic rings.
  • aryl groups include without limitation, phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, idenyl and the like.
  • Preferred aryl ring systems have from about 5 to about 20 carbon atoms in one or more rings.
  • Aryl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • halo and “halogen,” as used herein, refer to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
  • heteroaryl refers to a radical comprising a mono- or poly-cyclic aromatic ring, ring system or fused ring system wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic and includes one or more heteroatoms. Heteroaryl is also meant to include fused ring systems including systems where one or more of the fused rings contain no heteroatoms. Heteroaryl groups typically include one ring atom selected from sulfur, nitrogen or oxygen.
  • heteroaryl groups include without limitation, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isooxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiophenyl, furanyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzooxazolyl, quinoxalinyl and the like.
  • Heteroaryl radicals can be attached to a parent molecule directly or through a linking moiety such as an aliphatic group or hetero atom.
  • Heteroaryl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • heteroarylalkyl refers to a heteroaryl group as previously defined that further includes a covalently attached C 1 -C 12 alkyl radical.
  • the alkyl radical portion of the resulting heteroarylalkyl group is capable of forming a covalent bond with a parent molecule. Examples include without limitation, pyridinylmethyl, pyrimidinylethyl, napthyridinylpropyl and the like.
  • Heteroarylalkyl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups on one or both of the heteroaryl or alkyl portions.
  • heterocyclic radical refers to a radical mono-, or poly-cyclic ring system that includes at least one heteroatom and is unsaturated, partially saturated or fully saturated, thereby including heteroaryl groups. Heterocyclic is also meant to include fused ring systems wherein one or more of the fused rings contain at least one heteroatom and the other rings can contain one or more heteroatoms or optionally contain no heteroatoms.
  • a heterocyclic radical typically includes at least one atom selected from sulfur, nitrogen or oxygen.
  • heterocyclic radicals include, [1,3]dioxolanyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, quinoxalinyl, pyridazinonyl, tetrahydrofuryl and the like.
  • Heterocyclic groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • hydrocarbyl includes radical groups that comprise C, O and H. Included are straight, branched and cyclic groups having any degree of saturation. Such hydrocarbyl groups can include one or more heteroatoms selected from N, O and S and can be further mono or poly substituted with one or more substituent groups.
  • mono or poly cyclic structure includes all ring systems selected from single or polycyclic radical ring systems wherein the rings are fused or linked and is meant to be inclusive of single and mixed ring systems individually selected from aliphatic, alicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, arylalkyl, heterocyclic, heteroaryl, heteroaromatic and heteroarylalkyl.
  • Such mono and poly cyclic structures can contain rings that each have the same level of saturation or each, independently, have varying degrees of saturation including fully saturated, partially saturated or fully unsaturated.
  • Each ring can comprise ring atoms selected from C, N, O and S to give rise to heterocyclic rings as well as rings comprising only C ring atoms which can be present in a mixed motif such as for example benzimidazole wherein one ring has only carbon ring atoms and the fused ring has two nitrogen atoms.
  • the mono or poly cyclic structures can be further substituted with substituent groups such as for example phthalimide which has two ⁇ O groups attached to one of the rings.
  • Mono or poly cyclic structures can be attached to parent molecules using various strategies such as directly through a ring atom, through a substituent group or through a bifunctional linking moiety.
  • oxo refers to the group ( ⁇ O).
  • Linking groups or bifunctional linking moieties such as those known in the art are useful for attachment of chemical functional groups, conjugate groups, reporter groups and other groups to selective sites in a parent compound such as for example an oligomeric compound.
  • a bifunctional linking moiety comprises a hydrocarbyl moiety having two functional groups. One of the functional groups is selected to bind to a parent molecule or compound of interest and the other is selected to bind to essentially any selected group such as a chemical functional group or a conjugate group.
  • the linker comprises a chain structure or a polymer of repeating units such as ethylene glycols or amino acid units.
  • bifunctional linking moieties examples include without limitation, electrophiles for reacting with nucleophilic groups and nucleophiles for reacting with electrophilic groups.
  • bifunctional linking moieties include amino, hydroxyl, carboxylic acid, thiol, unsaturations (e.g., double or triple bonds), and the like.
  • Some nonlimiting examples of bifunctional linking moieties include 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanoic acid (ADO), succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl) cyclohexane-1-carboxylate (SMCC) and 6-aminohexanoic acid (AHEX or AHA).
  • linking groups include without limitation, substituted C 1 -C 10 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C 10 alkynyl, wherein a nonlimiting list of preferred substituent groups includes hydroxyl, amino, alkoxy, carboxy, benzyl, phenyl, nitro, thiol, thioalkoxy, halogen, alkyl, aryl, alkenyl and alkynyl.
  • the oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be modified by covalent attachment of one or more conjugate groups.
  • conjugate groups modify one or more properties of the oligomeric compounds they are attached to.
  • Such oligonucleotide properties include without limitation, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, binding, absorption, cellular distribution, cellular uptake, charge and clearance.
  • Conjugate groups are routinely used in the chemical arts and are linked directly or via an optional linking moiety or linking group to a parent compound such as an oligomeric compound.
  • conjugate groups includes without limitation, intercalators, reporter molecules, polyamines, polyamides, polyethylene glycols, thioethers, polyethers, cholesterols, thiocholesterols, cholic acid moieties, folate, lipids, phospholipids, biotin, phenazine, phenanthridine, anthraquinone, adamantane, acridine, fluoresceins, rhodamines, coumarins and dyes.
  • the oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be modified by covalent attachment of one or more 5′ or 3′-terminal groups.
  • the terms “5′ or 3′-terminal groups”, “5-terminal group” and “3′-terminal group” as used herein are meant to include useful groups known to the art skilled that can be placed on one or both of the 5′ and 3′-ends of an oligomeric compound respectively, for various purposes such as enabling the tracking of the oligomeric compound (a fluorescent label or other reporter group), improving the pharmacokinetics or pharmacodynamics of the oligomeric compound (such as for example: uptake and/or delivery) or enhancing one or more other desirable properties of the oligomeric compound (a group for improving nuclease stability or binding affinity).
  • 5′ and 3′-terminal groups include without limitation, modified or unmodified nucleosides; two or more linked nucleosides that are independently, modified or unmodified; conjugate groups; capping groups; phosphate moieties; and protecting groups.
  • phosphate moiety refers to a terminal phosphate group that includes phosphates as well as modified phosphates.
  • the phosphate moiety can be located at either terminus but is preferred at the 5′-terminal nucleoside.
  • the terminal phosphate is unmodified having the formula —O—P( ⁇ O)(OH)OH.
  • the terminal phosphate is modified such that one or more of the O and OH groups are replaced with H, O, S, N(R) or alkyl where R is H, an amino protecting group or unsubstituted or substituted alkyl.
  • the 5′ and or 3′ terminal group can comprise from 1 to 3 phosphate moieties that are each, independently, unmodified (di or tri-phosphates) or modified.
  • phosphorus moiety refers to a group having the formula:
  • R a and R c are each, independently, OH, SH, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
  • R b is O or S.
  • Phosphorus moieties included herein can be attached to a monomer, which can be used in the preparation of oligomeric compounds, wherein the monomer may be attached using O, S, NR d or CR e R f , wherein R d includes without limitation H, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, substituted C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, substituted C 2 -C 6 alkynyl or substituted acyl, and R e and R f each, independently, include without limitation H, halogen, C 1 -C 6 alkyl, substituted C 1 -C 6 alkyl, C 1 -C 6 alkoxy or substituted C 1 -C 6 alkoxy.
  • Such linked phosphorus moieties include without limitation, phosphates, modified phosphates, thiophosphates, modified thiophosphates, phosphonates, modified phosphonates, phosphoramidates and modified phosphoramidates.
  • protecting group refers to a labile chemical moiety which is known in the art to protect reactive groups including without limitation, hydroxyl, amino and thiol groups, against undesired reactions during synthetic procedures.
  • Protecting groups are typically used selectively and/or orthogonally to protect sites during reactions at other reactive sites and can then be removed to leave the unprotected group as is or available for further reactions.
  • Protecting groups as known in the art are described generally in Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 4th edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007.
  • Groups can be selectively incorporated into oligomeric compounds as provided herein as precursors.
  • an amino group can be placed into a compound as provided herein as an azido group that can be chemically converted to the amino group at a desired point in the synthesis.
  • groups are protected or present as precursors that will be inert to reactions that modify other areas of the parent molecule for conversion into their final groups at an appropriate time. Further representative protecting or precursor groups are discussed in Agrawal et al., Protocols for Oligonucleotide Conjugates , Humana Press; New Jersey, 1994, 26, 1-72.
  • orthogonal protected refers to functional groups which are protected with different classes of protecting groups, wherein each class of protecting group can be removed in any order and in the presence of all other classes (see, Barany et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1977, 99, 7363-7365; Barany et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1980, 102, 3084-3095).
  • Orthogonal protection is widely used in for example automated oligonucleotide synthesis.
  • a functional group is deblocked in the presence of one or more other protected functional groups which is not affected by the deblocking procedure. This deblocked functional group is reacted in some manner and at some point a further orthogonal protecting group is removed under a different set of reaction conditions. This allows for selective chemistry to arrive at a desired compound or oligomeric compound.
  • hydroxyl protecting groups include without limitation, acetyl, t-butyl, t-butoxymethyl, methoxymethyl, tetrahydropyranyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, 1-(2-chloroethoxyl)ethyl, p-chlorophenyl, 2,4-dinitrophenyl, benzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, diphenylmethyl, p-nitrobenzyl, bis(2-acetoxyethoxy)methyl (ACE), 2-trimethylsilylethyl, trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, triphenylsilyl, [(triisopropylsilyl)oxy]methyl (TOM), benzoylformate, chloroacetyl, trichloroacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, pivaloyl, benzo
  • hydroxyl protecting groups include without limitation, benzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, benzoyl, mesylate, tosylate, dimethoxytrityl (DMT), 9-phenylxanthine-9-yl (Pixyl) and 9-(p-methoxyphenyl)xanthine-9-yl (MOX).
  • amino protecting groups include without limitation, carbamate-protecting groups, such as 2-trimethylsilylethoxycarbonyl (Teoc), 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethoxycarbonyl (Bpoc), t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), allyloxycarbonyl (Alloc), 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), and benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz); amide-protecting groups, such as formyl, acetyl, trihaloacetyl, benzoyl, and nitrophenylacetyl; sulfonamide-protecting groups, such as 2-nitrobenzenesulfonyl; and imine- and cyclic imide-protecting groups, such as phthalimido and dithiasuccinoyl.
  • carbamate-protecting groups such as 2-trimethylsilylethoxycarbonyl (Teoc), 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenyly
  • thiol protecting groups include without limitation, triphenylmethyl (trityl), benzyl (Bn), and the like.
  • oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be prepared having one or more optionally protected phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages.
  • Representative protecting groups for phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages such as phosphodiester and phosphorothioate linkages include ⁇ -cyanoethyl, diphenylsilylethyl, ⁇ -cyanobutenyl, cyano p-xylyl (CPX), N-methyl-N-trifluoroacetyl ethyl (META), acetoxy phenoxy ethyl (APE) and butene-4-yl groups. See for example U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,725,677 and Re.
  • compounds having reactive phosphorus groups are provided that are useful for forming internucleoside linkages including for example phosphodiester and phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages.
  • Such reactive phosphorus groups are known in the art and contain phosphorus atoms in P III or P V valence state including, but not limited to, phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, phosphate triesters and phosphorus containing chiral auxiliaries.
  • reactive phosphorus groups are selected from diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite (—O*—P[N[(CH(CH 3 ) 2 ] 2 ]O(CH 2 ) 2 CN) and H-phosphonate (—O*—P( ⁇ O)(H)OH), wherein the O* is provided from the Markush group for the monomer.
  • a preferred synthetic solid phase synthesis utilizes phosphoramidites (P III chemistry) as reactive phosphites. The intermediate phosphite compounds are subsequently oxidized to the phosphate or thiophosphate (P V chemistry) using known methods to yield, phosphodiester or phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages. Additional reactive phosphates and phosphites are disclosed in Tetrahedron Report Number 309 (Beaucage and Iyer, Tetrahedron, 1992, 48, 2223-2311).
  • internucleoside linkage or “internucleoside linking group” is meant to include all manner of internucleoside linking groups known in the art including but not limited to, phosphorus containing internucleoside linking groups such as phosphodiester and phosphorothioate, and non-phosphorus containing internucleoside linking groups such as formacetyl and methyleneimino.
  • Internucleoside linkages also includes neutral non-ionic internucleoside linkages such as amide-3 (3′-CH 2 —C( ⁇ O)—N(H)-5′), amide-4 (3′-CH 2 —N(H)—C( ⁇ O)-5′) and methylphosphonate wherein a phosphorus atom is not always present.
  • neutral non-ionic internucleoside linkages such as amide-3 (3′-CH 2 —C( ⁇ O)—N(H)-5′), amide-4 (3′-CH 2 —N(H)—C( ⁇ O)-5′) and methylphosphonate wherein a phosphorus atom is not always present.
  • oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be prepared having one or more internucleoside linkages containing modified e.g. non-naturally occurring internucleoside linkages.
  • the two main classes of internucleoside linkages are defined by the presence or absence of a phosphorus atom.
  • Modified internucleoside linkages having a phosphorus atom include without limitation, phosphorothioates, chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3′-alkylene phosphonates, 5′-alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates including 3′-amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, selenophosphates and boranophosphates having normal 3′-5′ linkages, 2′-5′ linked analogs of these, and those having inverted polarity wherein one or more internucleotide linkages is a 3′ to 3′, 5′ to 5′ or 2′ to 2′ linkage.
  • Oligonucleotides having inverted polarity can comprise a single 3′ to 3′ linkage at the 3′-most internucleotide linkage i.e. a single inverted nucleoside residue which may be abasic (the nucleobase is missing or has a hydroxyl group in place thereof).
  • Various salts, mixed salts and free acid forms are also included.
  • oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be prepared having one or more non-phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages.
  • Such oligomeric compounds include without limitation, those that are formed by short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, or one or more short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic internucleoside linkages.
  • siloxane backbones include those having siloxane backbones; sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones; formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; riboacetyl backbones; alkene containing backbones; sulfamate backbones; methyleneimino and methylenehydrazino backbones; sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones; amide backbones; and others having mixed N, O, S and CH 2 component parts.
  • neutral internucleoside linkage is intended to include internucleoside linkages that are non-ionic.
  • Neutral internucleoside linkages include without limitation, phosphotriesters, methylphosphonates, MMI (3′-CH 2 —N(CH 3 )—O-5′), amide-3 (3′-CH 2 —C( ⁇ O)—N(H)-5′), amide-4 (3′-CH 2 —N(H)—C( ⁇ O)-5′), formacetal (3′-O—CH 2 —O-5′), and thioformacetal (3′-S—CH 2 —O-5′).
  • Further neutral internucleoside linkages include nonionic linkages comprising siloxane (dialkylsiloxane), carboxylate ester, carboxamide, sulfide, sulfonate ester and amides (See for example: Carbohydrate Modifications in Antisense Research ; Y. S. Sanghvi and P. D. Cook, Eds., ACS Symposium Series 580; Chapters 3 and 4, 40-65). Further neutral internucleoside linkages include nonionic linkages comprising mixed N, O, S and CH 2 component parts.
  • the bicyclic nucleosides provided herein can be prepared by any of the applicable techniques of organic synthesis, as, for example, illustrated in the examples below. Many such techniques are well known in the art. However, many of the known techniques are elaborated in Compendium of Organic Synthetic Methods , John Wiley & Sons, New York: Vol. 1, Ian T. Harrison and Shuyen Harrison, 1971; Vol. 2, Ian T. Harrison and Shuyen Harrison, 1974; Vol. 3, Louis S. Hegedus and Leroy Wade, 1977; Vol. 4, Leroy G. Wade Jr., 1980; Vol. 5, Leroy G. Wade Jr., 1984; and Vol. 6, Michael B.
  • the compounds described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-, a or B, or as (D)- or (L)- such as for amino acids. Included herein are all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms. Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures. The resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art.
  • nucleoside is a base-sugar combination.
  • the base portion of the nucleoside is normally a heterocyclic base moiety.
  • the two most common classes of such heterocyclic bases are purines and pyrimidines.
  • Nucleotides are nucleosides that further include a phosphate group covalently linked to the sugar portion of the nucleoside.
  • the phosphate group can be linked to either the 2′, 3′ or 5′ hydroxyl moiety of the sugar.
  • the phosphate groups covalently link adjacent nucleosides to one another to form a linear polymeric compound.
  • this linear polymeric structure can be joined to form a circular structure by hybridization or by formation of a covalent bond.
  • open linear structures are generally desired.
  • the phosphate groups are commonly referred to as forming the internucleoside linkages of the oligonucleotide.
  • the normal internucleoside linkage of RNA and DNA is a 3′ to 5′ phosphodiester linkage.
  • nucleotide mimetic as used herein is meant to include monomers that incorporate into oligomeric compounds with sugar and linkage surrogate groups, such as for example peptide nucleic acids (PNA) or morpholinos (linked by —N(H)—C( ⁇ O)—O—).
  • PNA peptide nucleic acids
  • morpholinos linked by —N(H)—C( ⁇ O)—O—.
  • the heterocyclic base at each position is maintained for hybridization to a nucleic acid target but the sugar and linkage is replaced with surrogate groups that are expected to function similar to native groups but have one or more enhanced properties.
  • nucleoside mimetic is intended to include those structures used to replace the sugar and the base at one or more positions of an oligomeric compound.
  • nucleoside mimetics include without limitation replacement of the heterocyclic base moiety with a mimetic thereof such as a phenoxazine moiety (for example the 9-(2-aminoethoxy)-1,3-diazaphenoxazine-2-one group, also referred to as a G-clamp which forms four hydrogen bonds when hybridized with a guanosine base) and further replacement of the sugar group with a group such as for example a morpholino, a cyclohexenyl or a bicyclo[3.1.0]hexyl.
  • a mimetic thereof such as a phenoxazine moiety (for example the 9-(2-aminoethoxy)-1,3-diazaphenoxazine-2-one group, also referred to as a G-clamp which forms four hydrogen bonds
  • modified nucleoside is meant to include all manner of modified nucleosides that can be incorporated into an oligomeric compound using oligomer synthesis.
  • the term is intended to include modifications made to a nucleoside such as modified stereochemical configurations, one or more substitutions, and deletion of groups as opposed to the use of surrogate groups which are described elsewhere herein.
  • the term includes nucleosides having a furanose sugar (or 4′-S analog) portion and can include a heterocyclic base or can include an abasic site.
  • modified nucleosides includes without limitation, substituted nucleosides (such as 2′, 5′, and/or 4′ substituted nucleosides) 4′-S-modified nucleosides, (such as 4′-S-ribonucleosides, 4′-S-2′-deoxyribonucleosides and 4′-S-2′-substituted ribonucleosides), bicyclic modified nucleosides (such as for example, bicyclic nucleosides wherein the sugar group has a 2′-O—CHR a -4′ bridging group, wherein R a is H, alkyl or substituted alkyl) and base modified nucleosides.
  • substituted nucleosides such as 2′, 5′, and/or 4′ substituted nucleosides
  • 4′-S-modified nucleosides such as 4′-S-ribonucleosides, 4′-S-2′-deoxyribonucleoside
  • the sugar can be modified with more than one of these modifications listed such as for example a bicyclic modified nucleoside further including a 5′-substitution or a 5′ or 4′ substituted nucleoside further including a 2′ substituent.
  • modified nucleoside also includes combinations of these modifications such as a base and sugar modified nucleosides. These modifications are meant to be illustrative and not exhaustive as other modifications are known in the art and are also envisioned as possible modifications for the modified nucleosides described herein.
  • the term “monomer subunit” is meant to include all manner of monomer units that are amenable to oligomer synthesis with one preferred list including monomer subunits such as ⁇ -D-ribonucleosides, ⁇ -D-2′-deoxyribnucleosides, modified nucleosides, including substituted nucleosides (such as 2′, 5′ and bis substituted nucleosides), 4′-S-modified nucleosides, (such as 4′-S-ribonucleosides, 4′-S-2′-deoxyribonucleosides and 4′-S-2′-substituted ribonucleosides), bicyclic modified nucleosides (such as bicyclic nucleosides wherein the sugar group has a 2′-O—CHR a -4′ bridging group, wherein R a is H, alkyl or substituted alkyl), other modified nucleosides, nucleoside mimetics
  • oligonucleotide refers to an oligomer or polymer of ribonucleic acid (RNA) or deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA). This term includes oligonucleotides composed of naturally-occurring nucleobases, sugars and covalent internucleoside linkages.
  • oligonucleotide analog refers to oligonucleotides that have one or more non-naturally occurring portions. Such non-naturally occurring oligonucleotides are often desired over naturally occurring forms because of desirable properties such as, for example, enhanced cellular uptake, enhanced affinity for nucleic acid target and/or increased stability in the presence of nucleases.
  • oligonucleoside refers to a sequence of nucleosides that are joined by internucleoside linkages that do not have phosphorus atoms. Internucleoside linkages of this type include short chain alkyl, cycloalkyl, mixed heteroatom alkyl, mixed heteroatom cycloalkyl, one or more short chain heteroatomic and one or more short chain heterocyclic.
  • internucleoside linkages include without limitation, siloxane, sulfide, sulfoxide, sulfone, acetyl, formacetyl, thioformacetyl, methylene formacetyl, thioformacetyl, alkeneyl, sulfamate, methyleneimino, methylenehydrazino, sulfonate, sulfonamide, amide and others having mixed N, O, S and CH 2 component parts.
  • heterocyclic base moiety and “nucleobase” as used herein, include unmodified or naturally occurring nucleobases, modified or non-naturally occurring nucleobases as well as synthetic mimetics thereof (such as for example phenoxazines).
  • a heterocyclic base moiety is heterocyclic system that contains one or more atoms or groups of atoms capable of hydrogen bonding to a base of a nucleic acid.
  • unmodified nucleobase and “naturally occurring nucleobase” include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), cytosine (C) and uracil (U).
  • Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases such as 5-methylcytosine (5-me-C), 5-hydroxymethyl cytosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-thiouracil, 2-thiothymine and 2-thiocytosine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl (—C ⁇ C—CH 3 ) uracil and cytosine and other alkynyl derivatives of pyrimidine bases, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 8-halo, 8-amino, 8-thiol, 8-thioalkyl, 8-hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and gu
  • nucleobases include tricyclic pyrimidines such as phenoxazine cytidine([5,4-b][1,4]benzoxazin-2(3H)-one), phenothiazine cytidine (1H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1,4]benzothiazin-2(3H)-one), G-clamps such as a substituted phenoxazine cytidine (e.g.
  • nucleobases may also include those in which the purine or pyrimidine base is replaced with other heterocycles, for example 7-deaza-adenine, 7-deazaguanosine, 2-aminopyridine and 2-pyridone. Further nucleobases include those disclosed in U.S. Pat.
  • heterocyclic base moiety of each of the bicyclic nucleosides can be modified with one or more substituent groups to enhance one or more properties such as affinity for a target strand or affect some other property in an advantageous manner.
  • Modified nucleobases include without limitation, universal bases, hydrophobic bases, promiscuous bases, size-expanded bases, and fluorinated bases as defined herein. Certain of these nucleobases are particularly useful for increasing the binding affinity of the oligomeric compounds as provided herein. These include 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and 0-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine.
  • oligomeric compound refers to a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits.
  • each linked monomer subunit is directly or indirectly attached to a heterocyclic base moiety but abasic sites are also possible.
  • At least some and generally most if not essentially all of the heterocyclic bases in an oligomeric compound are capable of hybridizing to a nucleic acid molecule, normally a preselected RNA target.
  • oligomeric compound therefore includes oligonucleotides, oligonucleotide analogs and oligonucleosides. It also includes polymers having a plurality of non-naturally occurring nucleoside mimetics and or nucleosides having sugar surrogate groups.
  • oligomeric compounds comprise a plurality of monomer subunits independently selected from naturally occurring nucleosides, non-naturally occurring nucleosides, modified nucleosides, nucleoside mimetics, and nucleosides having sugar surrogate groups.
  • oligomeric compounds having specific motifs as disclosed herein it can be advantageous to mix non-naturally occurring monomer subunits such as the bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein with other non-naturally occurring monomer subunits, naturally occurring monomer subunits (nucleosides) or mixtures thereof.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided herein comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits wherein at least one monomer subunit is a bicyclic nucleoside as provided herein.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided comprising a plurality of bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein.
  • Oligomeric compounds are routinely prepared linearly but can also be joined or otherwise prepared to be circular and/or can be prepared to include branching. Oligomeric compounds can form double stranded constructs such as for example two strands hybridized to form a double stranded composition. Double stranded compositions can be linked or separate and can include various other groups such as conjugates and/or overhangs on the ends.
  • Oligomeric compounds provided herein can optionally contain one or more nucleosides wherein the sugar group has been modified.
  • Such sugar modified nucleosides may impart enhanced nuclease stability, increased binding affinity or some other beneficial biological property to the oligomeric compounds.
  • modified sugar refers to modifications that can be made to the furanose sugar portion of otherwise unmodified or modified nucleosides useful herein.
  • modified sugars include without limitation substitution with one or more substituent groups, bridging of two non-geminal ring carbon atoms to form a bicyclic nucleoside or substitution of the 4′-O atom with a disubstituted methylene group [C(R) 2 ] or a heteroatom or substituted heteroatom (NR).
  • Modified sugar moieties can also comprise mixtures of these modifications such as for example putting a 5′-substituent group on a bicyclic nucleoside.
  • substituent groups useful for modifying sugar moieties of nucleosides include without limitation 2′-F, 2′-allyl, 2′-amino, 2′-azido, 2′-thio, 2′-O-allyl, 2′-OCF 3 , 2′-O—C 1 -C 10 alkyl, 2′-O—CH 3 , OCF 3 , 2′-O—CH 2 CH 3 , 2′-O—(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 , 2′-O—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—CH 3 , 2′-O(CH 2 ) 2 SCH 3 , 2′-O—CH 2 —CH ⁇ CH 2 (MOE), 2′-O—(CH 2 ) 3 —N(R m )(R n ), 2′-O—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—N(R m )(R n ), 2′-O—(CH 2 ) 2 —O—(CH 2 ) 2 —N(CH
  • bicyclic nucleic acid and “bicyclic nucleoside” refer to nucleosides wherein the sugar portion of the nucleoside is bicyclic (e.g. bicyclic sugar).
  • a bicyclic nucleic acid comprises a nucleoside wherein the furanose ring comprises a bridge between two non-geminal ring carbon atoms.
  • Examples of bicyclic nucleosides include without limitation nucleosides comprising a bridge between the 4′ and the 2′ ribosyl ring atoms.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein include one or more bicyclic nucleosides wherein the bridge comprises one of the formulae: 4′-(CH 2 )—O-2′ (LNA); 4′-(CH 2 )—S-2; 4′-(CH 2 ) 2 —O-2′ (ENA); 4′-CH(CH 3 )—O-2′ and 4′-CH(CH 2 OCH 3 )—O-2′ (and analogs thereof see U.S. Pat. No. 7,399,845, issued on Jul. 15, 2008); 4′-C(CH 3 )(CH 3 )—O-2′ (and analogs thereof see published International Application WO/2009/006478, published Jan.
  • the bridge comprises one of the formulae: 4′-(CH 2 )—O-2′ (LNA); 4′-(CH 2 )—S-2; 4′-(CH 2 ) 2 —O-2′ (ENA); 4′-CH(CH 3 )—O-2′ and 4′-CH(CH 2 OCH 3
  • bicyclic nucleosides can be prepared having one or more stereochemical sugar configurations including for example ⁇ -L-ribofuranose and ⁇ -D-ribofuranose (see PCT international application PCT/DK98/00393, published on Mar. 25, 1999 as WO 99/14226).
  • sugar surrogate refers to replacement of the nucleoside furanose ring with a non-furanose (or 4′-substituted furanose) group with another structure such as another ring system or open system.
  • Such structures can be as simple as a six membered ring as opposed to the five membered furanose ring or can be more complicated as is the case with the non-ring system used in peptide nucleic acid.
  • the term is meant to include replacement of the sugar group with all manner of sugar surrogates know in the art and includes without limitation sugar surrogate groups such as morpholinos, cyclohexenyls and cyclohexitols. In most monomer subunits having a sugar surrogate group the heterocyclic base moiety is generally maintained to permit hybridization.
  • nucleosides having sugar surrogate groups include without limitation, replacement of the ribosyl ring with a surrogate ring system such as a tetrahydropyranyl ring system (also referred to as hexitol) as illustrated below:
  • oligomeric compounds comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits, of essentially any viable length to practice the methods disclosed herein.
  • Such oligomeric compounds will include at least one and preferably a plurality of the bicyclic nucleosides provided herein and may also include other monomer subunits including but not limited to nucleosides, modified nucleosides, nucleosides comprising sugar surrogate groups and nucleoside mimetics.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to about 80 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, or 80 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to 40 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39 or 40 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to 20 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to 16 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 10 to 14 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 10 to 18 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 10 to 21 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or 21 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 12 to 14 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 12, 13 or 14 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 12 to 18 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 12 to 21 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or 21 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 14 to 18 monomer subunits in length.
  • oligomeric compounds of 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • oligomeric compounds of any of a variety of ranges of lengths of linked monomer subunits are provided.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided consisting of X—Y linked monomer subunits, where X and Y are each independently selected from 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, and 50; provided that X ⁇ Y.
  • this provides oligomeric compounds comprising: 8-9, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 8-13, 8-14, 8-15, 8-16, 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, 8-20, 8-21, 8-22, 8-23, 8-24, 8-25, 8-26, 8-27, 8-28, 8-29, 8-30, 9-10, 9-11, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14, 9-15, 9-16, 9-17, 9-18, 9-19, 9-20, 9-21, 9-22, 9-23, 9-24, 9-25, 9-26, 9-27, 9-28, 9-29, 9-30, 10-11, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-22, 10-23, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26, 10-27, 10-28, 10-29, 10-30, 11-12, 11-13, 11-14, 11-15, 11-16, 11-17, 11-18, 11-19, 11-20, 11-21, 10-22, 10-23, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26, 10-
  • the ranges for the oligomeric compounds listed herein are meant to limit the number of monomer subunits in the oligomeric compounds, however such oligomeric compounds may further include 5′ and/or 3′-terminal groups including but not limited to protecting groups such as hydroxyl protecting groups, optionally linked conjugate groups and/or other substituent groups.
  • the preparation of oligomeric compounds as disclosed herein is performed according to literature procedures for DNA: Protocols for Oligonucleotides and Analogs, Agrawal, Ed., Humana Press, 1993, and/or RNA: Scaringe, Methods, 2001, 23, 206-217; Gait et al., Applications of Chemically synthesized RNA in RNA:Protein Interactions , Smith, Ed., 1998, 1-36; Gallo et al., Tetrahedron, 2001, 57, 5707-5713. Additional methods for solid-phase synthesis may be found in Caruthers U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,415,732; 4,458,066; 4,500,707; 4,668,777; 4,973,679; and 5,132,418; and Koster U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,725,677 and Re. 34,069.
  • Oligomeric compounds are routinely prepared using solid support methods as opposed to solution phase methods.
  • Commercially available equipment commonly used for the preparation of oligomeric compounds that utilize the solid support method is sold by several vendors including, for example, Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.). Any other means for such synthesis known in the art may additionally or alternatively be employed.
  • Suitable solid phase techniques, including automated synthesis techniques, are described in Oligonucleotides and Analogues, a Practical Approach , F. Eckstein, Ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1991.
  • RNA and related analogs have been increasing as efforts in RNA interference and micro RNA increase.
  • the primary RNA synthesis strategies that are presently being used commercially include 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-[1(2-fluorophenyl)-4-methoxypiperidin-4-yl] (FPMP), 2′-O-[(triisopropylsilyl)oxy]methyl (2′-O—CH 2 —O-Si(iPr) 3 (TOM) and the 5′-O-silyl ether-2′-ACE (5′-O-bis(trimethylsiloxy)cyclododecyloxysilyl ether (DOD)-2′-O-bis(2-acetoxyethoxy)methyl (ACE).
  • TDMS 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-t-butyldimethylsilyl
  • FPMP 5′-O-
  • RNA synthesis activator advertised to reduce coupling times especially with TOM and TBDMS chemistries.
  • RNA synthesis strategies can be used herein.
  • the aforementioned RNA synthesis strategies can be performed together in a hybrid fashion e.g. using a 5′-protecting group from one strategy with a 2′-O-protecting from another strategy.
  • hybridization includes the pairing of complementary strands of oligomeric compounds such as including the binding of an oligomeric compound as provided herein to a target nucleic acid.
  • the mechanism of pairing involves hydrogen bonding, which may be Watson-Crick, Hoogsteen or reversed Hoogsteen hydrogen bonding, between complementary heterocyclic base moieties of nucleosides (or monomer subunits) that are in close enough proximity to hydrogen bond.
  • hydrogen bonding which may be Watson-Crick, Hoogsteen or reversed Hoogsteen hydrogen bonding, between complementary heterocyclic base moieties of nucleosides (or monomer subunits) that are in close enough proximity to hydrogen bond.
  • adenine and thymine are complementary nucleobases which pair through the formation of hydrogen bonds.
  • Hybridization can occur under varying circumstances.
  • An oligomeric compound is specifically hybridizable when binding of the compound to the target nucleic acid interferes with the normal function of the target nucleic acid resulting in a loss of activity.
  • To be specifically hybridizable also requires a sufficient degree of complementarity to avoid non-specific binding of the oligomeric compound to non-target nucleic acid sequences under the conditions in which specific binding is desired, i.e., under physiological conditions (for in vivo assays or therapeutic treatment) or other diagnostic conditions (for performing in vitro assays).
  • the term “complementary,” refers to the capacity for precise pairing of two nucleobases regardless of where the two nucleobases are located. For example, if a nucleobase at a certain position of an oligomeric compound is capable of hydrogen bonding with a nucleobase at a certain position of a target nucleic acid, the target nucleic acid being a DNA, RNA, or oligonucleotide molecule, then the position of hydrogen bonding between the oligonucleotide and the target nucleic acid is considered to be a complementary position.
  • oligomeric compound and the further DNA, RNA, or oligonucleotide molecule are complementary to each other when a sufficient number of complementary positions in each molecule are occupied by nucleobases which can hydrogen bond with each other.
  • “specifically hybridizable” and “complementary” are terms which are used to indicate a sufficient degree of precise pairing or complementarity over a sufficient number of nucleobases such that stable and specific binding occurs between an oligomeric compound and its target nucleic acid.
  • oligomeric compounds need not be 100% complementary to that of its target nucleic acid to be specifically hybridizable. Moreover, an oligomeric compound may hybridize over one or more segments such that intervening or adjacent segments are not involved in the hybridization event (e.g., a loop structure or hairpin structure). In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds can comprise at least about 70%, at least about 80%, at least about 90%, at least about 95%, or at least about 99% sequence complementarity to a target region within the target nucleic acid sequence to which they are targeted.
  • an oligomeric compound in which 18 of 20 nucleobases of the oligomeric compound are complementary to a target region, and would therefore specifically hybridize would represent 90 percent complementarity.
  • the remaining noncomplementary nucleobases may be clustered or interspersed with complementary nucleobases and need not be contiguous to each other or to complementary nucleobases.
  • an oligomeric compound which is 18 nucleobases in length having 4 (four) noncomplementary nucleobases which are flanked by two regions of complete complementarity with the target nucleic acid would have 77.8% overall complementarity with the target nucleic acid and would thus fall within this scope.
  • Percent complementarity of an oligomeric compound with a region of a target nucleic acid can be determined routinely using BLAST programs (basic local alignment search tools) and PowerBLAST programs known in the art (Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol., 1990, 215, 403-410; Zhang and Madden, Genome Res., 1997, 7, 649-656).
  • oligomeric compounds such as antisense oligomeric compounds, antisense oligonucleotides, ribozymes, external guide sequence (EGS) oligonucleotides, alternate splicers, primers, probes, and other oligomeric compounds which hybridize to at least a portion of the target nucleic acid.
  • these oligomeric compounds may be introduced in the form of single-stranded, double-stranded, circular or hairpin oligomeric compounds and may contain structural elements such as internal or terminal bulges or loops.
  • the oligomeric compounds provided herein may elicit the action of one or more enzymes or structural proteins to effect modification of the target nucleic acid.
  • the oligomeric compound may inhibit the activity the target nucleic acid through an occupancy-based method, thus interfering with the activity of the target nucleic acid.
  • RNAse H a cellular endonuclease which cleaves the RNA strand of an RNA:DNA duplex. It is known in the art that single-stranded oligomeric compounds which are “DNA-like” elicit RNAse H. Activation of RNase H, therefore, results in cleavage of the RNA target, thereby greatly enhancing the efficiency of oligonucleotide-mediated inhibition of gene expression. Similar roles have been postulated for other ribonucleases such as those in the RNase III and ribonuclease L family of enzymes.
  • oligomeric compound is a single-stranded antisense oligonucleotide
  • double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) molecules has been shown to induce potent and specific antisense-mediated reduction of the function of a gene or its associated gene products. This phenomenon occurs in both plants and animals and is believed to have an evolutionary connection to viral defense and transposon silencing.
  • “suitable target segments” may be employed in a screen for additional oligomeric compounds that modulate the expression of a selected protein.
  • “Modulators” are those oligomeric compounds that decrease or increase the expression of a nucleic acid molecule encoding a protein and which comprise at least an 8-nucleobase portion which is complementary to a suitable target segment.
  • the screening method comprises the steps of contacting a suitable target segment of a nucleic acid molecule encoding a protein with one or more candidate modulators, and selecting for one or more candidate modulators which decrease or increase the expression of a nucleic acid molecule encoding a protein. Once it is shown that the candidate modulator or modulators are capable of modulating (e.g.
  • the modulator may then be employed herein in further investigative studies of the function of the peptide, or for use as a research, diagnostic, or therapeutic agent.
  • candidate modulators may be evaluated by the extent to which they increase the expression of a microRNA target RNA or protein (as interference with the activity of a microRNA will result in the increased expression of one or more targets of the microRNA).
  • Suitable target segments may also be combined with their respective complementary oligomeric compounds provided herein to form stabilized double-stranded (duplexed) oligonucleotides.
  • double stranded oligonucleotide moieties have been shown in the art to modulate target expression and regulate translation as well as RNA processing via an antisense mechanism.
  • the double-stranded moieties may be subject to chemical modifications (Fire et al., Nature, 1998, 391, 806-811; Timmons and Fire, Nature, 1998, 395, 854; Timmons et al., Gene, 2001, 263, 103-112; Tabara et al., Science, 1998, 282, 430-431; Montgomery et al., Proc.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein can also be applied in the areas of drug discovery and target validation.
  • provided herein is the use of the oligomeric compounds and targets identified herein in drug discovery efforts to elucidate relationships that exist between proteins and a disease state, phenotype, or condition.
  • These methods include detecting or modulating a target peptide comprising contacting a sample, tissue, cell, or organism with one or more oligomeric compounds provided herein, measuring the nucleic acid or protein level of the target and/or a related phenotypic or chemical endpoint at some time after treatment, and optionally comparing the measured value to a non-treated sample or sample treated with a further oligomeric compound as provided herein.
  • oligomeric compounds are provided for use in therapy.
  • the therapy is reducing target messenger RNA.
  • a dose refers to a specified quantity of a pharmaceutical agent provided in a single administration.
  • a dose may be administered in two or more boluses, tablets, or injections.
  • the desired dose requires a volume not easily accommodated by a single injection.
  • two or more injections may be used to achieve the desired dose.
  • a dose may be administered in two or more injections to minimize injection site reaction in an individual.
  • chemically-modified oligomeric compounds are provided herein that may have a higher affinity for target RNAs than does non-modified DNA.
  • higher affinity in turn provides increased potency allowing for the administration of lower doses of such compounds, reduced potential for toxicity, improvement in therapeutic index and decreased overall cost of therapy.
  • RNAi activity Effect of nucleoside modifications on RNAi activity is evaluated according to existing literature (Elbashir et al., Nature, 2001, 411, 494-498; Nishikura et al., Cell, 2001, 107, 415-416; and Bass et al., Cell, 2000, 101, 235-238.)
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein can be utilized for diagnostics, therapeutics, prophylaxis and as research reagents and kits. Furthermore, antisense oligonucleotides, which are able to inhibit gene expression with 17, specificity, are often used by those of ordinary skill to elucidate the function of particular genes or to distinguish between functions of various members of a biological pathway. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein can be utilized either alone or in combination with other oligomeric compounds or other therapeutics as tools in differential and/or combinatorial analyses to elucidate expression patterns of a portion or the entire complement of genes expressed within cells and tissues. Oligomeric compounds can also be effectively used as primers and probes under conditions favoring gene amplification or detection, respectively.
  • primers and probes are useful in methods requiring the specific detection of nucleic acid molecules encoding proteins and in the amplification of the nucleic acid molecules for detection or for use in further studies.
  • Hybridization of oligomeric compounds as provided herein, particularly the primers and probes, with a nucleic acid can be detected by means known in the art. Such means may include conjugation of an enzyme to the oligonucleotide, radiolabelling of the oligonucleotide or any other suitable detection means. Kits using such detection means for detecting the level of selected proteins in a sample may also be prepared.
  • expression patterns within cells or tissues treated with one or more of the oligomeric compounds provided herein are compared to control cells or tissues not treated with oligomeric compounds and the patterns produced are analyzed for differential levels of gene expression as they pertain, for example, to disease association, signaling pathway, cellular localization, expression level, size, structure or function of the genes examined. These analyses can be performed on stimulated or unstimulated cells and in the presence or absence of other compounds and or oligomeric compounds which affect expression patterns.
  • Examples of methods of gene expression analysis known in the art include DNA arrays or microarrays (Brazma and Vilo, FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 17-24; Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16), SAGE (serial analysis of gene expression)(Madden, et al., Drug Discov. Today, 2000, 5, 415-425), READS (restriction enzyme amplification of digested cDNAs) (Prashar and Weissman, Methods Enzymol., 1999, 303, 258-72), TOGA (total gene expression analysis) (Sutcliffe, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • oligomeric compounds provided herein can be utilized as described, the following examples serve only to illustrate and are not intended to be limiting.
  • Compound 1 is prepared according to the procedure of Moffatt et al, J. Org. Chem., 1979, 44, 1301. Compound 1 is also commercially available from a number of vendors.
  • the crude oil (269 g, 0.67 moles), was dissolved in acetic acid (2.2 L) and water (900 mL). The reaction was allowed to proceed for 16 hours at room temperature. The reaction was follow by tlc (20% EtOAc/Hexanes). After completion of the reaction, most of the acetic acid was evaporated under reduced pressure and then the remaining solution was poured into a stirred mixture of EtOAc (1 L)/NaHCO 3 (1 L, aq. sat.) in small portions followed by NaHCO 3 (s) until gas evolution ceased. The organic layer was washed with water (1 L ⁇ 2), brine (1 L), dried Na 2 SO 4 , filtered and removed under reduced pressure to give a crude yellow oil.
  • the crude compound (105 g, 0.293 moles), was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (1 L) followed by the addition of imidazole (39.9 g, 0.58 moles).
  • the resulting yellow solution was cooled to 0° C. in ice-bath while stirring under nitrogen.
  • tert-Butyldimethylsilyl chloride (TBDMSCl, 48.5 ml, 0.322 moles) dissolved in a minimal amount of DMF was added drop-wise over a 40-minute period.
  • the ice-bath initially at 0° C. upon complete addition, was allowed to come to room temperature and stirring continued for an additional 16 hours.
  • Oxalyl chloride (12.2 mL, 145 mmoles) and CH 2 Cl 2 (280 mL) were added to a 2 L round bottom flask fitted with two addition funnels.
  • One addition funnel contained DMSO (20.5 mL, 289 mmoles) in CH 2 Cl 2 (30 mL), while the other funnel contained compound 2 (45.75 g, 96.4 mmoles) dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (380 mL).
  • the round bottom was then cooled to ⁇ 78° C. under nitrogen, and the DMSO solution was added dropwise over 15 minutes. After stirring an additional 50 minutes, the solution of compound 2 was added dropwise over 15 min.
  • N,O-Bis(trimethylsilyl)acetamide (BSA, 54.7 mL, 224 mmol) was added to a stirred suspension of uracil (10.2 g, 90.7 mmol) and compound 4 (31.1 g, 60.4 mmoles) in dry acetonitrile (300 mL). After stirring at rt for 30 min a clear solution was observed, and the reaction was cooled to 0° C. under nitrogen. Trimethylsilyfluoromethanesulfonate (TMSOTf, 21.9 mL, 121 mmol) was added and after the reaction was stirred at rt for 15 min, it was transferred to a preheated oil bath at 80° C.
  • TMSOTf Trimethylsilyfluoromethanesulfonate
  • triol compound 5 (16.1 g, 36.5 mmoles) in dry DMF (180 mL) was added camphorsulphonic acid (CSA, 850 mg) followed by benzaldehyde dimethylacetal (BDMA, 22 mL, 146 mmoles). This was stirred at 50° C., and after two hours additional CSA (600 mg) and BDMA (6 mL) were added. After an additional 2 h, the reaction mixture was cooled to rt and partitioned between EtOAc (300 mL) and a NaHCO 3 (sat)/H 2 O (500 mL, 3:2).
  • CSA camphorsulphonic acid
  • BDMA benzaldehyde dimethylacetal
  • the resultant crude product was purified by column chromatography (2.5% to 5% methanol/DCM) to give 19.74 g of the diol, which was immediately treated with THF (175 mL), H 2 O (175 mL) and NaIO 4 (15 g, 70 mmoles). After 1 hour, water and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO 3 and brine and then dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude aldehyde. This compound was immediately treated with 4 equivalents of NaBH 4 in methanol at 0° C.
  • Compound 6 is prepared as per the procedures illustrated in Example 1.
  • Compound 6 is prepared as per the procedures illustrated in Example 1.
  • nucleoside phosphoramidites The preparation of nucleoside phosphoramidites is performed following procedures that are illustrated herein and in the art such as but not limited to U.S. Pat. No. 6,426,220 and published PCT WO 02/36743.
  • oligomeric compounds used in accordance with this invention may be conveniently and routinely made through the well-known technique of solid phase synthesis.
  • Equipment for such synthesis is sold by several vendors including, for example, Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.). Any other means for such synthesis known in the art may additionally or alternatively be employed. It is well known to use similar techniques to prepare oligonucleotides such as alkylated derivatives and those having phosphorothioate linkages.
  • Oligomeric compounds Unsubstituted and substituted phosphodiester (P ⁇ O) oligomeric compounds, including without limitation, oligonucleotides can be synthesized on an automated DNA synthesizer (Applied Biosystems model 394) using standard phosphoramidite chemistry with oxidation by iodine.
  • phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages are synthesized similar to phosphodiester internucleoside linkages with the following exceptions: thiation is effected by utilizing a 10% w/v solution of 3,H-1,2-benzodithiole-3-one 1,1-dioxide in acetonitrile for the oxidation of the phosphite linkages. The thiation reaction step time is increased to 180 sec and preceded by the normal capping step. After cleavage from the CPG column and deblocking in concentrated ammonium hydroxide at 55° C.
  • the oligomeric compounds are recovered by precipitating with greater than 3 volumes of ethanol from a 1 M NH 4 OAc solution.
  • Phosphinate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270.
  • Alkyl phosphonate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863.
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylene phosphonate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,610,289 or 5,625,050.
  • Phosphoramidite internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878.
  • Alkylphosphonothioate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in published PCT applications PCT/US94/00902 and PCT/US93/06976 (published as WO 94/17093 and WO 94/02499, respectively).
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925.
  • Phosphotriester internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243.
  • Borano phosphate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,130,302 and 5,177,198.
  • Oligomeric compounds having one or more non-phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages including without limitation methylenemethylimino linked oligonucleosides, also identified as MMI linked oligonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligonucleosides, also identified as MDH linked oligonucleosides, methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-3 linked oligonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-4 linked oligonucleosides, as well as mixed backbone oligomeric compounds having, for instance, alternating MMI and P ⁇ O or P ⁇ S linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,378,825, 5,386,023, 5,489,677, 5,602,240 and 5,610,289.
  • Formacetal and thioformacetal internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564.
  • Ethylene oxide internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,618.
  • the oligomeric compounds including without limitation oligonucleotides and oligonucleosides, are recovered by precipitation out of 1 M NH 4 OAc with >3 volumes of ethanol. Synthesized oligomeric compounds are analyzed by electrospray mass spectroscopy (molecular weight determination) and by capillary gel electrophoresis. The relative amounts of phosphorothioate and phosphodiester linkages obtained in the synthesis is determined by the ratio of correct molecular weight relative to the ⁇ 16 amu product (+/ ⁇ 32+/ ⁇ 48).
  • oligomeric compounds are purified by HPLC, as described by Chiang et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1991, 266, 18162-18171. Results obtained with HPLC-purified material are generally similar to those obtained with non-HPLC purified material.
  • Oligomeric compounds can be synthesized via solid phase P(III) phosphoramidite chemistry on an automated synthesizer capable of assembling 96 sequences simultaneously in a 96-well format.
  • Phosphodiester internucleoside linkages are afforded by oxidation with aqueous iodine.
  • Phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages are generated by sulfurization utilizing 3,H-1,2 benzodithiole-3-one 1,1 dioxide (Beaucage Reagent) in anhydrous acetonitrile.
  • Standard base-protected beta-cyanoethyl-diiso-propyl phosphoramidites can be purchased from commercial vendors (e.g.
  • Non-standard nucleosides are synthesized as per standard or patented methods and can be functionalized as base protected beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites.
  • Oligomeric compounds can be cleaved from support and deprotected with concentrated NH 4 OH at elevated temperature (55-60° C.) for 12-16 hours and the released product then dried in vacuo. The dried product is then re-suspended in sterile water to afford a master plate from which all analytical and test plate samples are then diluted utilizing robotic pipettors.
  • the concentration of oligomeric compounds in each well can be assessed by dilution of samples and UV absorption spectroscopy.
  • the full-length integrity of the individual products can be evaluated by capillary electrophoresis (CE) in either the 96-well format (Beckman P/ACETM MDQ) or, for individually prepared samples, on a commercial CE apparatus (e.g., Beckman P/ACETM 5000, ABI 270). Base and backbone composition is confirmed by mass analysis of the oligomeric compounds utilizing electrospray-mass spectroscopy. All assay test plates are diluted from the master plate using single and multi-channel robotic pipettors. Plates are judged to be acceptable if at least 85% of the oligomeric compounds on the plate are at least 85% full length.
  • oligomeric compounds on target nucleic acid expression is tested in any of a variety of cell types provided that the target nucleic acid is present at measurable levels. This can be routinely determined using, for example, PCR or Northern blot analysis. Cell lines derived from multiple tissues and species can be obtained from American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, Manassas, Va.).
  • the following cell type is provided for illustrative purposes, but other cell types can be routinely used, provided that the target is expressed in the cell type chosen. This can be readily determined by methods routine in the art, for example Northern blot analysis, ribonuclease protection assays or RT-PCR.
  • b.END cells The mouse brain endothelial cell line b.END was obtained from Dr. Werner Risau at the Max Plank Institute (Bad Nauheim, Germany). b.END cells are routinely cultured in DMEM, high glucose (Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.). Cells are routinely passaged by trypsinization and dilution when they reached approximately 90% confluence. Cells are seeded into 96-well plates (Falcon-Primaria #353872, BD Biosciences, Bedford, Mass.) at a density of approximately 3000 cells/well for uses including but not limited to oligomeric compound transfection experiments.
  • oligomeric compounds When cells reached 65-75% confluency, they are treated with one or more oligomeric compounds.
  • the oligomeric compound is mixed with LIPOFECTINTM Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.) in Opti-MEMTM-1 reduced serum medium (Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.) to achieve the desired concentration of the oligomeric compound(s) and a LIPOFECTINTM concentration of 2.5 or 3 ⁇ g/mL per 100 nM oligomeric compound(s).
  • This transfection mixture is incubated at room temperature for approximately 0.5 hours. For cells grown in 96-well plates, wells are washed once with 100 ⁇ L OPTI-MEMTM-1 and then treated with 130 ⁇ L of the transfection mixture.
  • Cells grown in 24-well plates or other standard tissue culture plates are treated similarly, using appropriate volumes of medium and oligomeric compound(s). Cells are treated and data are obtained in duplicate or triplicate. After approximately 4-7 hours of treatment at 37° C., the medium containing the transfection mixture is replaced with fresh culture medium. Cells are harvested 16-24 hours after treatment with oligomeric compound(s).
  • transfection reagents known in the art include, but are not limited to, CYTOFECTINTM, LIPOFECTAMINETM, OLIGOFECTAMINETM, and FUGENETM.
  • Other suitable transfection methods known in the art include, but are not limited to, electroporation.
  • Quantitation of target mRNA levels is accomplished by real-time quantitative PCR using the ABI PRISMTM 7600, 7700, or 7900 Sequence Detection System (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) according to manufacturer's instructions.
  • ABI PRISMTM 7600, 7700, or 7900 Sequence Detection System PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.
  • This is a closed-tube, non-gel-based, fluorescence detection system which allows high-throughput quantitation of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) products in real-time.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • products in real-time quantitative PCR are quantitated as they accumulate. This is accomplished by including in the PCR reaction an oligonucleotide probe that anneals specifically between the forward and reverse PCR primers, and contains two fluorescent dyes.
  • a reporter dye e.g., FAM or JOE, obtained from either PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, Calif. or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa
  • a quencher dye e.g., TAMRA, obtained from either PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, Calif. or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa
  • TAMRA obtained from either PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, Calif. or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa
  • annealing of the probe to the target sequence creates a substrate that can be cleaved by the 5′-exonuclease activity of Taq polymerase.
  • cleavage of the probe by Taq polymerase releases the reporter dye from the remainder of the probe (and hence from the quencher moiety) and a sequence-specific fluorescent signal is generated.
  • additional reporter dye molecules are cleaved from their respective probes, and the fluorescence intensity is monitored at regular intervals by laser optics built into the ABI PRISMTM Sequence Detection System.
  • a series of parallel reactions containing serial dilutions of mRNA from untreated control samples generates a standard curve that is used to quantitate the percent inhibition after antisense oligonucleotide treatment of test samples.
  • primer-probe sets specific to the target gene being measured are evaluated for their ability to be “multiplexed” with a GAPDH amplification reaction.
  • multiplexing both the target gene and the internal standard gene GAPDH are amplified concurrently in a single sample.
  • mRNA isolated from untreated cells is serially diluted. Each dilution is amplified in the presence of primer-probe sets specific for GAPDH only, target gene only (“single-plexing”), or both (multiplexing).
  • standard curves of GAPDH and target mRNA signal as a function of dilution are generated from both the single-plexed and multiplexed samples.
  • the primer-probe set specific for that target is deemed multiplexable.
  • Other methods of PCR are also known in the art.
  • RT and PCR reagents are obtained from Invitrogen Life Technologies (Carlsbad, Calif.).
  • RT real-time PCR is carried out by adding 20 ⁇ L PCR cocktail (2.5 ⁇ PCR buffer minus MgCl 2 , 6.6 mM MgCl 2 , 375 ⁇ M each of dATP, dCTP, dCTP and dGTP, 375 nM each of forward primer and reverse primer, 125 nM of probe, 4 Units RNAse inhibitor, 1.25 Units PLATINUM® Taq, 5 Units MuLV reverse transcriptase, and 2.5 ⁇ ROX dye) to 96-well plates containing 30 ⁇ L total RNA solution (20-200 ng).
  • PCR cocktail 2.5 ⁇ PCR buffer minus MgCl 2 , 6.6 mM MgCl 2 , 375 ⁇ M each of dATP, dCTP, dCTP and dGTP, 375 nM each of forward primer and reverse primer, 125 n
  • the RT reaction is carried out by incubation for 30 minutes at 48° C. Following a 10 minute incubation at 95° C. to activate the PLATINUM® Taq, 40 cycles of a two-step PCR protocol are carried out: 95° C. for 15 seconds (denaturation) followed by 60° C. for 1.5 minutes (annealing/-extension).
  • Gene target quantities obtained by RT, real-time PCR are normalized using either the expression level of GAPDH, a gene whose expression is constant, or by quantifying total RNA using RIBOGREENTM (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene, Oreg.).
  • GAPDH expression is quantified by real time RT-PCR, by being run simultaneously with the target, multiplexing, or separately.
  • Total RNA is quantified using RiboGreenTM RNA quantification reagent (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene, Oreg.). Methods of RNA quantification by RIBOGREENTM are taught in Jones, L. J., et al, (Analytical Biochemistry, 1998, 265, 368-374).
  • RIBOGREENTM working reagent RIBOGREENTM working reagent diluted 1:350 in 10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 7.5
  • RIBOGREENTM reagent diluted 1:350 in 10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 7.5 is pipetted into a 96-well plate containing 30 ⁇ L purified, cellular RNA.
  • the plate is read in a CytoFluor 4000 (PE Applied Biosystems) with excitation at 485 nm and emission at 530 nm.
  • Antisense modulation of a target expression can be assayed in a variety of ways known in the art.
  • a target mRNA levels can be quantitated by, e.g., Northern blot analysis, competitive polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or real-time PCR.
  • Real-time quantitative PCR is presently desired.
  • RNA analysis can be performed on total cellular RNA or poly(A)+mRNA.
  • One method of RNA analysis of the present disclosure is the use of total cellular RNA as described in other examples herein. Methods of RNA isolation are well known in the art.
  • Northern blot analysis is also routine in the art.
  • Real-time quantitative (PCR) can be conveniently accomplished using the commercially available ABI PRISMTM 7600, 7700, or 7900 Sequence Detection System, available from PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif. and used according to manufacturer's instructions.
  • Protein levels of a target can be quantitated in a variety of ways well known in the art, such as immunoprecipitation, Western blot analysis (immunoblotting), enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) or fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • Antibodies directed to a target can be identified and obtained from a variety of sources, such as the MSRS catalog of antibodies (Aerie Corporation, Birmingham, Mich.), or can be prepared via conventional monoclonal or polyclonal antibody generation methods well known in the art. Methods for preparation of polyclonal antisera are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp.
  • Immunoprecipitation methods are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp. 10.16.1-10.16.11, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998.
  • Western blot (immunoblot) analysis is standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp. 10.8.1-10.8.21, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997.
  • Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays ELISA are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology , Volume 2, pp. 11.2.1-11.2.22, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1991.
  • the oligomeric compounds are further investigated in one or more phenotypic assays, each having measurable endpoints predictive of efficacy in the treatment of a particular disease state or condition.
  • Phenotypic assays, kits and reagents for their use are well known to those skilled in the art and are herein used to investigate the role and/or association of a target in health and disease.
  • Representative phenotypic assays which can be purchased from any one of several commercial vendors, include those for determining cell viability, cytotoxicity, proliferation or cell survival (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.; PerkinElmer, Boston, Mass.), protein-based assays including enzymatic assays (Panvera, LLC, Madison, Wis.; BD Biosciences, Franklin Lakes, N.J.; Oncogene Research Products, San Diego, Calif.), cell regulation, signal transduction, inflammation, oxidative processes and apoptosis (Assay Designs Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich.), triglyceride accumulation (Sigma-Aldrich, St.
  • cells determined to be appropriate for a particular phenotypic assay i.e., MCF-7 cells selected for breast cancer studies; adipocytes for obesity studies
  • a target inhibitors identified from the in vitro studies as well as control compounds at optimal concentrations which are determined by the methods described above.
  • treated and untreated cells are analyzed by one or more methods specific for the assay to determine phenotypic outcomes and endpoints.
  • Phenotypic endpoints include changes in cell morphology over time or treatment dose as well as changes in levels of cellular components such as proteins, lipids, nucleic acids, hormones, saccharides or metals. Measurements of cellular status which include pH, stage of the cell cycle, intake or excretion of biological indicators by the cell, are also endpoints of interest.
  • Measurement of the expression of one or more of the genes of the cell after treatment is also used as an indicator of the efficacy or potency of the target inhibitors.
  • Hallmark genes or those genes suspected to be associated with a specific disease state, condition, or phenotype, are measured in both treated and untreated cells.
  • the individual subjects of the in vivo studies described herein are warm-blooded vertebrate animals, which includes humans.
  • Poly(A)+mRNA is isolated according to Miura et al., (Clin. Chem., 1996, 42, 1758-1764). Other methods for poly(A)+mRNA isolation are routine in the art. Briefly, for cells grown on 96-well plates, growth medium is removed from the cells and each well is washed with 200 ⁇ L cold PBS. 60 ⁇ L lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaCl, 0.5% NP-40, 20 mM vanadyl-ribonucleoside complex) is added to each well, the plate is gently agitated and then incubated at room temperature for five minutes.
  • lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaCl, 0.5% NP-40, 20 mM vanadyl-ribonucleoside complex
  • lysate is transferred to Oligo d(T) coated 96-well plates (AGCT Inc., Irvine Calif.). Plates are incubated for 60 minutes at room temperature, washed 3 times with 200 ⁇ L of wash buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.3 M NaCl). After the final wash, the plate is blotted on paper towels to remove excess wash buffer and then air-dried for 5 minutes. 60 ⁇ L of elution buffer (5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6), preheated to 70° C., is added to each well, the plate is incubated on a 90° C. hot plate for 5 minutes, and the eluate is then transferred to a fresh 96-well plate.
  • wash buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.3 M NaCl). After the final wash, the plate is blotted on paper towels to remove excess wash buffer and then air-dried for 5 minutes.
  • Cells grown on 100 mm or other standard plates may be treated similarly, using appropriate volumes of all solutions.
  • Total RNA is isolated using an RNEASY 96TM kit and buffers purchased from Qiagen Inc. (Valencia, Calif.) following the manufacturer's recommended procedures. Briefly, for cells grown on 96-well plates, growth medium is removed from the cells and each well is washed with 200 ⁇ L cold PBS. 150 ⁇ L Buffer RLT is added to each well and the plate vigorously agitated for 20 seconds. 150 ⁇ L of 70% ethanol is then added to each well and the contents mixed by pipetting three times up and down. The samples are then transferred to the RNEASY 96TM well plate attached to a QIAVACTM manifold fitted with a waste collection tray and attached to a vacuum source. Vacuum is applied for 1 minute.
  • Buffer RW1 500 ⁇ L of Buffer RW1 is added to each well of the RNEASY 96TM plate and incubated for 15 minutes and the vacuum is again applied for 1 minute.
  • An additional 500 ⁇ L of Buffer RW1 is added to each well of the RNEASY 96TM plate and the vacuum is applied for 2 minutes.
  • 1 mL of Buffer RPE is then added to each well of the RNEASY 96TM plate and the vacuum applied for a period of 90 seconds.
  • the Buffer RPE wash is then repeated and the vacuum is applied for an additional 3 minutes.
  • the plate is then removed from the QIAVACTM manifold and blotted dry on paper towels.
  • RNA is then eluted by pipetting 140 ⁇ L of RNAse free water into each well, incubating 1 minute, and then applying the vacuum for 3 minutes.
  • the repetitive pipetting and elution steps may be automated using a QIAGEN Bio-Robot 9604 (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia Calif.). Essentially, after lysing of the cells on the culture plate, the plate is transferred to the robot deck where the pipetting, DNase treatment and elution steps are carried out.
  • Probes and primers may be designed to hybridize to a target sequence, using published sequence information.
  • primer-probe set was designed using published sequence information (GENBANKTM accession number U92436.1, SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • Reverse primer TGCACATATCATTACACCAGTTCGT (SEQ ID NO: 3)
  • FAM-TTGCAGCAATTCACTGTAAAGCTGGAAAGG-TAMRA (SEQ ID NO: 4), where FAM is the fluorescent dye and TAMRA is the quencher dye.
  • Western blot analysis is carried out using standard methods.
  • Cells are harvested 16-20 h after oligonucleotide treatment, washed once with PBS, suspended in Laemmli buffer (100 ⁇ l/well), boiled for 5 minutes and loaded on a 16% SDS-PAGE gel. Gels are run for 1.5 hours at 150 V, and transferred to membrane for western blotting.
  • Appropriate primary antibody directed to a target is used, with a radiolabeled or fluorescently labeled secondary antibody directed against the primary antibody species. Bands are visualized using a PHOSPHORIMAGERTM (Molecular Dynamics, Sunnyvale Calif.).
  • a 2-10-2 Gapped oligomeric compound was synthesized and tested for its ability to reduce PTEN expression in B.END cells.
  • B.END cells were treated with the oligomeric compound indicated at a concentration of 20 and 40 nM using methods described herein.
  • PTEN mRNA levels were measured using quantitative real-time PCR following routine methods described herein. The data represents averages from two experiments.
  • Tm's were assessed in 100 mM phosphate buffer, 0.1 mM EDTA, pH 7, at 260 nm using bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid modified oligomers and 4 ⁇ M complementary RNA.
  • Bx is the heterocyclic base.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Plant Pathology (AREA)
  • Microbiology (AREA)
  • Saccharide Compounds (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides bicyclic cyclohexose nucleoside analogs and oligomeric compounds comprising these nucleoside analogs. These bicyclic nucleoside analogs are useful for enhancing properties of oligomeric compounds including nuclease resistance.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • Provided herein are novel bicyclic nucleoside analogs and oligomeric compounds and compositions prepared therefrom. More particularly, bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided wherein the naturally occurring pentofuranose ring is replaced with a cyclohexyl ring that comprises one ring heteroatom and a bridge making the ring system bicyclic. In certain embodiments, the oligomeric compounds and compositions of the present invention are expected to hybridize to a portion of a target RNA resulting in loss of normal function of the target RNA. The oligomeric compounds provided herein are also expected to be useful as primers and probes in diagnostic applications.
  • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The present application is being filed along with a Sequence Listing in electronic format. The Sequence Listing is provided as a file entitled CHEM0030USC1SEQ_ST25.txt, created on Mar. 18, 2015 which is 8 Kb in size. The information in the electronic format of the sequence listing is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Antisense technology is an effective means for reducing the expression of one or more specific gene products and can therefore prove to be uniquely useful in a number of therapeutic, diagnostic, and research applications. Chemically modified nucleosides are routinely used for incorporation into antisense sequences to enhance one or more properties such as for example nuclease resistance. One such group of chemical modifications includes bicyclic nucleosides wherein the furanose portion of the nucleoside includes a bridge connecting two atoms on the furanose ring thereby forming a bicyclic ring system. Such bicyclic nucleosides have various names including BNA's and LNA's for bicyclic nucleic acids or locked nucleic acids respectively.
  • Various BNA's have been prepared and reported in the patent literature as well as in scientific literature, see for example: Singh et al., Chem. Commun., 1998, 4, 455-456; Koshkin et al., Tetrahedron, 1998, 54, 3607-3630; Wahlestedt et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A., 2000, 97, 5633-5638; Kumar et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1998, 8, 2219-2222; Wengel et al., PCT International Application WO 98-DK393 19980914; Singh et al., J. Org. Chem., 1998, 63, 10035-10039, the text of each is incorporated by reference herein, in their entirety. Examples of issued US patents and published applications include for example: U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,053,207, 6,770,748, 6,268,490 and 6,794,499 and published U.S. applications 20040219565, 20040014959, 20030207841, 20040192918, 20030224377, 20040143114 and 20030082807; the text of each is incorporated by reference herein, in their entirety.
  • Many BNA's are toxic. See, e.g., Swayze, E. E.; Siwkowski, A. M.; Wancewicz, E. V.; Migawa, M. T.; Wyrzykiewicz, T. K.; Hung, G.; Monia, B. P.; Bennett, C. F., Antisense oligonucleotides containing locked nucleic acid improve potency but cause significant hepatotoxicity in animals. Nucl. Acids Res., doi: 10.1093/nar/gkl1071 (December 2006, advanced online publication).
  • Many alternative chemically modified nucleosides have been prepared, for instance nucleosides comprising 2′ modifications, nucleosides comprising 5′ modifications, and nucleosides utilizing non-natural bases. Anhydrohexitol nucleic acids have been prepared (but not as the bicyclic analog, see Wouters and Herdewijn, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1999, 9, 1563-1566).
  • There remains a long-felt need for new agents that specifically regulate gene expression via antisense mechanisms. Disclosed herein are bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acids and antisense compounds prepared therefrom useful for modulating gene expression pathways, including those relying on mechanisms of action such as RNaseH, RNAi and dsRNA enzymes, as well as other antisense mechanisms based on target degradation or target occupancy. One having skill in the art, once armed with this disclosure will be able, without undue experimentation, to identify, prepare and exploit antisense compounds for these uses.
  • BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • Provided herein are novel bicyclic nucleoside analogs and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom. More particularly, the bicyclic nucleoside analogs provided herein have a core structure comprising a cyclohexyl ring wherein one of the ring carbons is replaced with a heteroatom. The cyclohexyl core also includes a bridge connecting two of the ring carbon atoms wherein the two bridging ring carbon atoms have at least one ring carbon atom separating them. In certain embodiments, the oligomeric compounds are expected to hybridize to a portion of a target RNA resulting in loss of normal function of the target RNA. The oligomeric compounds are also expected to be useful as primers and probes in diagnostic applications.
  • The variables are defined individually in further detail herein. It is to be understood that the bicyclic nucleoside analogs and oligomeric compounds provided herein include all combinations of the embodiments disclosed and variables defined herein.
  • In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided herein having formula I:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00001
  • wherein:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety;
  • Z is O or S;
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R1), C(R1)(R2), C(R1)═C(R2), C(R1)═N, C(═NR1), Si(R1)2, S(O)2, S(O), C(═O) and C(═S);
  • each R1 and R2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ1 NJ1J2, SJ1N3, COOJ1, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2-J1 or S(═O)-J1;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C1-C12 aminoalkyl, substituted C1-C12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • one of E1 and E2 is H and the other of E1 and E2 is O-T2 or one of E3 and E4 is H and the other of E3 and E4 is O-T2 and the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, OJ3, NJ3J4, SJ3, N3, COOJ3, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2-J3 or S(═O)-J3;
  • one of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety and the other of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group;
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
      • L is O, S or NJ7; and
  • each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, each substituted group comprises one or more substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
  • L is O, S or NJ7; and
  • each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, or C1-C6 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, Bx is uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • In certain embodiments, Z is O.
  • In certain embodiments, one of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is OT2 and the remaining three of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are H. In certain embodiments, one of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is OT2, one of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is H and the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are, independently, halogen, C1-C6 alkyl or substituted C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, one of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is OT2, two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are H and the remaining one of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is halogen, C1-C6 alkyl or substituted C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, the remaining of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is, independently, fluoro, methyl or substituted methyl.
  • In certain embodiments, L1 and L2 are each H. In certain embodiments, one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is other than H. In certain embodiments, L1 and L2 are each other than H. In certain embodiments, one of L1 and L2 is substituted C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, the substituted C1-C6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from halogen, C2-C6 alkenyl, OJ5, NJ5J6 and CN, wherein each J5 and J6 is, independently, H or C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, the substituted C1-C6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from fluoro and OCH3. In certain embodiments, at least one of L1 and L2 is C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, one of L1 and L2 is methyl.
  • In certain embodiments, T1 is selected from acetyl, benzyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl and dimethoxytrityl. In certain embodiments, T1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl. In certain embodiments, T1 is a phosphorus moiety. In certain embodiments, T2 is a reactive phosphorus group. In certain embodiments, T2 is a reactive phosphorus group selected from diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite and H-phosphonate. In certain embodiments, T1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl and T2 is diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite.
  • In certain embodiments, Q comprises from 2 to 4 of the linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, Q comprises 2 or 3 of the linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, Q comprises 1 of the biradical groups. In certain embodiments, Q is C(R1)(R2), C(R1)(R2)—C(R1)(R2) or O—C(R1)(R2). In certain embodiments, Q is CH2, (CH2)2 or O—CH2. In certain embodiments, Q is 2′-O—CH2-5′.
  • In certain embodiments, further bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided having formula I wherein:
  • Q is 5′-CR3R4—O-2′, 5′-CR3R4—S-2′, 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)3-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4—CR3R4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—O—N(R5)-2′ or 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)—O-2′;
  • each R3 and R4 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R5 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy or substituted C1-C6 alkoxy;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl or substituted C2-C6 alkenyl;
  • one of E1 and E2 is H and the other of E1 and E2 is O-T2 or one of E3 and E4 is H and the other of E3 and E4 is O-T2 and the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, substituted C2-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • one of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group selected from a phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, phosphate triester and a phosphorus containing chiral auxiliary and the other of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety having the formula:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00002
  • wherein:
  • Ra and Rc are each, independently, OH, SH, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
  • Rb is O or S; and
  • wherein each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C1-C6 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein Bx is uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • In certain embodiments, the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein Z is O.
  • In certain embodiments, the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are each H. In certain embodiments, one of the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is H and the other one of the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is CH3, CH2CH3, OCH3 or F.
  • In certain embodiments, the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein L1 and L2 are each H. In certain embodiments, one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is CH3 or OCH3.
  • In certain embodiments, the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein T1 is a phosphorus moiety. In certain embodiments, T1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl. In certain embodiments, T2 is diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite. In certain embodiments, T1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl and T2 is diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite.
  • In certain embodiments, the further bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided wherein Q is 5′-CR3R4—O-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-CR3R4—O—N(R5)-2′ or 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)—O-2′. In certain embodiments, Q is 5′-CH2—O-2′.
  • In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided having the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00003
  • In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleoside analogs having formula I are provided having the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00004
  • In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided wherein one of E1 and E2 is H and the other of E1 and E2 is O-T2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00005
  • In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided wherein one of E1 and E2 is H and the other of E1 and E2 is O-T2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00006
  • In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided wherein one of E3 and E4 is H and the other of E3 and E4 is O-T2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00007
  • In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided wherein one of E3 and E4 is H and the other of E3 and E4 is O-T2 and the resultant bicyclic nucleoside analog has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00008
  • Further provided herein are oligomeric compounds that each comprise at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00009
  • wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety;
  • Z is O or S;
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R1), C(R1)(R2), C(R1)═C(R2), C(R1)═N, C(═NR1), Si(R1)2, S(O)2, S(O), C(═O) and C(═S);
  • each R1 and R2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ1NJ1H2, SJ1N3, COOJ1, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2-J1 or S(═O)-J1;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C1-C12 aminoalkyl, substituted C1-C12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • one of E5 and E6 is H and the other of E5 and E6 is O-T4 or one of E7 and E8 is H and the other of E7 and E8 is O-T4 and the remaining two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, OJ3, NJ3J4, SJ3, N3, COOJ3, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2-J3 or S(═O)-J3;
  • one of T3 and T4 is an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound and the other of T3 and T4 is H, a protecting group, a phosphorus moiety, a 5′ or 3′-terminal group or an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound;
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
  • L is O, S or NJ7; and
  • each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, each substituted group comprises one or more substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
  • L is O, S or NJ7; and
  • each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, or C1-C6 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II, Bx is uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Z is O.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is OT4 and the remaining three of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is OT4, one of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is H and the remaining two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are, independently, halogen, C1-C6 alkyl or substituted C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is OT4, two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are H and the remaining one of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is halogen, C1-C6 alkyl or substituted C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the remaining of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is, independently, fluoro, methyl or substituted methyl.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II L1 and L2 are each H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is other than H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II L1 and L2 are each other than H. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L1 and L2 is substituted C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the substituted C1-C6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from halogen, C2-C6 alkenyl, OJ5, NJ5J6 and CN, wherein each J5 and J6 is, independently, H or C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the substituted C1-C6 alkyl comprises at least one substituent group selected from fluoro and OCH3. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II at least one of L1 and L2 is C1-C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L1 and L2 is methyl.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein at least one of T3 and T4 is a 5′ or 3′-terminal group. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein one T3 is a phosphorus moiety. In certain embodiments, the phosphorus moiety has the formula:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00010
  • wherein R8 is O or S.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein one T3 is H and one T4 is H.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q comprises from 2 to 4 of said linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q comprises 2 or 3 of said linked biradical groups. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q comprises 1 of said biradical groups. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is C(R1)(R2), C(R1)(R2)—C(R1)(R2) or O—C(R1)(R2). In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is CH2, (CH2)2 or O—CH2. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is 2′-O—CH2-5′.
  • In certain embodiments, further oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Q is 5′-CR3R4—O-2′, 5′-CR3R4—S-2′, 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)3-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4—CR3R4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—O—N(R5)-2′ or 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)—O-2;
  • each R3 and R4 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R5 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy or substituted C1-C6 alkoxy;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl or substituted C2-C6 alkenyl;
  • one of E5 and E6 is H and the other of E5 and E6 is O-T4 or one of E7 and E8 is H and the other of E7 and E8 is O-T4 and the remaining two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, substituted C2-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen; and
  • wherein each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C1-C6 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Bx uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine
  • In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Z is O.
  • In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II the remaining two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are each H for each bicyclic nucleoside of formula II. In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is H and the other one of the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is CH3, CH2CH3, OCH3 or F.
  • In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II L1 and L2 are each H.
  • In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is CH3 or OCH3.
  • In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein one T3 is a phosphorus moiety.
  • In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is 5′-CR3R4—O-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-CR3R4—O—N(R5)-2′ or 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)—O-2′. In certain embodiments, the further oligomeric compounds are provided wherein for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II Q is 5′-CH2—O-2′.
  • In certain embodiments, each of the further oligomeric compounds are provided comprising one phosphorus moiety having the formula:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00011
  • wherein R8 is O or S.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00012
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00013
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E5 and E6 is H and the other of E5 and E6 is O-T4 having the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00014
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E5 and E6 is H and the other of E5 and E6 is O-T4 having the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00015
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E7 and E8 is H and the other of E7 and E8 is O-T4 having the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00016
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II one of E7 and E8 is H and the other of E7 and E8 is O-T4 having the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00017
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II is located at the 5′ end.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising at least one region having at least 2 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II. In certain embodiments, the at least one region comprises from 2 to 5 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising at least two regions wherein each region independently comprises from 1 to about 5 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II and wherein each region is separated by at least one monomer subunit that is different from the bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II and is independently selected from nucleosides and modified nucleosides. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising a gapped oligomeric compound wherein one region of contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II is located at the 5′-end and a second region of contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of Formula II is located at the 3′-end, wherein the two regions are separated by an internal region comprising from about 6 to about 18 monomer subunits independently selected from nucleosides and modified nucleosides that are different from the bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II. In certain embodiments, the internal region comprises from about 8 to about 14 contiguous β-D-2′-deoxyribofuranosyl nucleosides. In certain embodiments, the internal region comprises from about 9 to about 12 contiguous β-D-2′-deoxyribofuranosyl nucleosides.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising one region of from 2 to 3 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II, an optional second region of from 1 to 3 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs of formula II and a third region of from 8 to 14 β-D-2′-deoxyribofuranosyl nucleosides wherein said third region is located between said first and said second regions.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein each internucleoside linking group is, independently, a phosphodiester internucleoside linking group or a phosphorothioate internucleoside linking group. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided wherein essentially each internucleoside linking group is a phosphorothioate internucleoside linking group.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 8 to about 40 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 8 to about 20 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 10 to about 16 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising from about 0 to about 14 monomer subunits in length.
  • Also provided herein are bicyclic nucleoside analogs wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog comprises a 6 membered ring having 5 carbon atoms and one heteroatom selected from oxygen, sulfur or substituted amino, wherein a first ring carbon flanking the ring heteroatom is substituted with a nucleobase and the opposite flanking ring carbon is substituted with a first group that can form an internucleoside linkage; one additional ring carbon is substituted with a second group that can form an internucleoside linkage; and wherein said 6 membered ring comprises a bridge connecting two ring carbon atoms of said six membered ring wherein the two ring atoms are separated by at least one additional ring atom. In certain embodiments, each of the groups that can form an internucleoside linkage is, independently, hydroxyl, protected hydroxyl, hydroxymethylene, protected hydroxymethylene or a reactive phosphorus group. In certain embodiments, the bridge comprises a single atom between said two ring carbons thereby having a 2.2.1. bicyclic ring structure. In certain embodiments, the bridge comprises two atoms between said two ring carbons thereby having a 2.2.2. bicyclic ring structure. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising at least one of these bicyclic nucleoside analogs.
  • Also provided herein are methods of inhibiting gene expression comprising contacting one or more cells, a tissue or an animal with an oligomeric compound as provided herein.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided herein for use in an in vivo method of inhibiting gene expression said method comprising contacting one or more cells, a tissue or an animal with an oligomeric compound as provided herein.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds as provided herein are used in medical therapy.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • Provided herein are novel bicyclic nucleosides and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom. More particularly, the bicyclic nucleosides each have a core structure comprising a cyclohexyl ring wherein one of the ring carbons is replaced with a heteroatom. Attached to one of the two carbon atoms flanking the heteroatom is a heterocyclic base moiety and attached to the other flanking carbon atom is a first group capable of forming an internucleoside linkage. A second group capable of forming an internucleoside linkage is adjacent to or one atom removed from the first group capable of forming an internucleoside linkage. The core six membered ring system further comprises a bridge connecting two of the ring carbon atoms wherein the two bridging ring carbon atoms have at least one ring carbon atom separating them.
  • The bridge forming the second ring is variable comprising a single biradical group such as for example a methylene or substituted methylene group or up to about 8 biradical groups linked together. Biradical groups that can be used individually or linked together to form larger bridging groups include, but are not limited to: O, S, N(R1), C(R1)(R2), C(R1)═C(R2), C(R1)═N, C(═NR1), Si(R1)2, SO2, SO, C(═O) and C(═S) where R1 and R2 are as listed above. The conformation (α or β) of the bicyclic nucleosides can also be varied by choosing the route of synthesis to place the bridge above the plane of the 6 membered ring system or below it.
  • The groups capable of forming internucleoside linkages can be variable. Preferred groups capable of forming internucleoside linkages include optionally protected primary and secondary alcohols and reactive phosphorus groups such as phosphoramidites and H-phosphonates. In one preferred embodiment one of the groups capable of forming an internucleoside linkage is an optionally protected hydroxymethylene and the other group is an optionally protected hydroxyl or reactive phosphorus group.
  • In certain embodiments, the bicyclic nucleosides are expected to be useful for enhancing desired properties of oligomeric compounds in which they are incorporated such as for example nuclease resistance. In certain embodiments, the oligomeric compounds provided herein are expected to hybridize to a portion of a target RNA resulting in loss of normal function of the target RNA. The oligomeric compounds provided herein are also expected to be useful as primers and probes in diagnostic applications. In certain embodiments, bicyclic nucleosides of the present invention have formula I shown below:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00018
  • wherein:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety;
  • Z is O or S;
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R1), C(R1)(R2), C(R1)═C(R2), C(R1)═N, C(═NR1), Si(R1)2, S(O)2, S(O), C(═O) and C(═S);
  • each R1 and R2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ1NJ1J2, SJ1N3, COOJ1, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2J1 or S(═O)-J1;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C1-C12 aminoalkyl, substituted C1-C12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • one of E1 and E2 is H and the other of E1 and E2 is O-T2 or one of E3 and E4 is H and the other of E3 and E4 is O-T2 and the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, OJ3, NJ3J4, SJ3, N3, COOJ3, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2-J3 or S(═O)-J3;
  • one of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety and the other of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group;
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
  • L is O, S or NJ7; and
  • each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, further bicyclic nucleoside analogs are provided having formula I wherein:
  • Q is 5′-CR3R4—O-2′, 5′-CR3R4—S-2′, 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)3-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4—CR3R4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—O—N(R5)-2′ or 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)—O-2′;
  • each R3 and R4 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R5 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy or substituted C1-C6 alkoxy;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl or substituted C2-C6 alkenyl;
  • one of E1 and E2 is H and the other of E1 and E2 is O-T2 or one of E3 and E4 is H and the other of E3 and E4 is O-T2 and the remaining two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, substituted C2-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • one of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group selected from a phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, phosphate triester and a phosphorus containing chiral auxiliary and the other of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety having the formula:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00019
  • wherein:
  • Ra and Rc are each, independently, OH, SH, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
  • Rb is O or S; and
  • wherein each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C1-C6 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00020
  • wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety;
  • Z is O or S;
  • Q is a bridge group comprising 1 or from 2 to 8 linked biradical groups independently selected from O, S, N(R1), C(R1)(R2), C(R1)═C(R2), C(R1)═N, C(═NR1), Si(R1)2, S(O)2, S(O), C(═O) and C(═S);
  • each R1 and R2 is, independently, H, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, halogen, OJ1NJ1J2, SJ1N3, COOJ1, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2-J1 or S(═O)-J1;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, C1-C12 aminoalkyl, substituted C1-C12 aminoalkyl or a protecting group;
  • one of E5 and E6 is H and the other of E5 and E6 is O-T4 or one of E7 and E8 is H and the other of E7 and E8 is O-T4 and the remaining two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are each, independently, H, halogen, hydroxyl, C1-C12 alkyl, substituted C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, substituted C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl, substituted C5-C20 aryl, a heterocycle radical, a substituted heterocycle radical, heteroaryl, substituted heteroaryl, C5-C7 alicyclic radical, substituted C5-C7 alicyclic radical, OJ3, NJ3J4, SJ3, N3, COOJ3, acyl (C(═O)—H), substituted acyl, CN, S(═O)2-J3 or S(═O)-J3;
  • one of T3 and T4 is an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound and the other of T3 and T4 is H, a protecting group, a phosphorus moiety, a 5′ or 3′-terminal group or an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the oligomeric compound;
  • each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
  • L is O, S or NJ7; and
  • each J1, J2, J3, J4, J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, substituted C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl. In certain embodiments, further oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II:
  • Q is 5′-CR3R4—O-2′, 5′-CR3R4—S-2′, 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)3-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—CR3═CR4-2′, 5′-CR3═CR4—CR3R4-2′, 5′-C(═CR3R4)—(CR3R4)2-2′, 5′-CR3R4—C(═CR3R4)—CR3R4-2′, 5′-(CR3R4)2—C(═CR3R4)-2′, 5′-CR3R4—O—N(R5)-2′ or 5′-CR3R4—N(R5)—O-2′;
  • each R3 and R4 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
  • R5 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy or substituted C1-C6 alkoxy;
  • L1 and L2 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl or substituted C2-C6 alkenyl;
  • one of E5 and E6 is H and the other of E5 and E6 is O-T4 or one of E7 and E8 is H and the other of E7 and E8 is O-T4 and the remaining two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are each, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, substituted C2-C6 alkenyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen; and
  • wherein each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and C1-C6 aminoalkyl.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00021
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II are provided wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog of formula II has the configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00022
  • Incorporation of one or more of the bicyclic nucleosides, as provided herein, into an oligomeric compound is expected to enhance one or more desired properties of the resulting oligomeric compound. Such properties include without limitation stability, nuclease resistance, binding affinity, specificity, absorption, cellular distribution, cellular uptake, charge, clearance and pharmacodynamics and pharmacokinetics in general.
  • In certain embodiments, the bicyclic nucleosides provided herein are incorporated into oligomeric compounds such that a motif results. The placement of bicyclic nucleosides into oligomeric compounds to provide particular motifs can enhance the desired properties of the resulting oligomeric compounds for activity using a particular mechanism such as RNaseH or RNAi. Such motifs include without limitation, gapped motifs, hemimer motifs, blockmer motifs, uniformly fully modified motifs, positionally modified motifs and alternating motifs. In conjunction with these motifs a wide variety of internucleoside linkages can also be used including but not limited to phosphodiester and phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages which can be incorporated uniformly or in various combinations. The oligomeric compounds can further include at least one 5′ or 3′ terminal group such as for example a conjugate or reporter group. The positioning of the bicyclic nucleosides provided herein, the use of linkage strategies and 5′ or 3′ terminal groups can be easily optimized to enhance a desired activity for a selected target.
  • As used herein the term “motif” refers to the pattern created by the relative positioning of monomer subunits within an oligomeric compound wherein the pattern is determined by comparing the sugar groups. The only determinant for the motif of an oligomeric compound is the differences or lack of differences between the sugar groups. The internucleoside linkage, heterocyclic base and further groups such as terminal groups are not considered when determining the motif of an oligomeric compound. As used herein the term “sugar group” as it applies to motifs includes naturally occurring sugars having a furanose ring, sugars having a modified furanose ring and sugar surrogates wherein the furanose ring has been replaced with another ring system such as for example a morpholino or hexitol ring system. When each sugar group is the same (either modified furanose or surrogate ring system) the motif is termed uniformly fully modified. When two or more types of sugar groups are present the motif is defined by the pattern created from the positioning of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group relative to the positioning of monomer subunits having different types of sugar groups within an oligomeric compound.
  • Illustrative examples of some different types of sugar groups useful in the preparation of oligomeric compounds having motifs include without limitation, β-D-ribose, β-D-2′-deoxyribose, substituted sugars (such as 2′, 5′ and bis substituted sugars), 4′-S-sugars (such as 4′-S-ribose, 4′-S-2′-deoxyribose and 4′-S-2′-substituted ribose), bicyclic modified sugars (such as the 2′-O—CH2-4′ or 2′-O—(CH2)2-4′ bridged ribose derived bicyclic sugars) and sugar surrogates (such as when the ribose ring has been replaced with a morpholino or a hexitol ring system). The type of heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage used at each position is variable and is not a factor in determining the motif. The presence of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups is also not a factor in determining the motif
  • Representative U.S. patents that teach the preparation of motifs include without limitation, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,013,830; 5,149,797; 5,220,007; 5,256,775; 5,366,878; 5,403,711; 5,491,133; 5,565,350; 5,623,065; 5,652,355; 5,652,356; and 5,700,922, certain of which are commonly owned with the instant application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety. Motifs are also disclosed in International Applications PCT/US2005/019219, filed Jun. 2, 2005 and published as WO 2005/121371 on Dec. 22, 2005 and PCT/US2005/019220, filed Jun. 2, 2005 and published as WO 2005/121372 on Dec. 22, 2005; each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • As used herein the term “alternating motif” refers to a an oligomeric compound comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits wherein the monomer subunits have two different types of sugar groups that alternate for essentially the entire sequence of the oligomeric compound. Oligomeric compounds having an alternating motif can be described by the formula: 5′-A(-L-B-L-A)n(-L-B)nn-3′ where A and B are monomer subunits that have different sugar groups, each L is, independently, an internucleoside linking group, n is from about 4 to about 12 and nn is 0 or 1. The heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position. The motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups. This permits alternating oligomeric compounds from about 9 to about 26 monomer subunits in length. This length range is not meant to be limiting as longer and shorter oligomeric compounds are also amenable to oligomeric compounds provided herein. In certain embodiments, each A or each B comprise bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein.
  • As used herein the term “uniformly fully modified motif” refers to an oligomeric compound comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits that each have the same type of sugar group. The heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position. The motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups. In certain embodiments, the uniformly fully modified motif includes a contiguous sequence of bicyclic nucleosides. In certain embodiments, one or both of the 5′ and 3′-ends of the contiguous sequence of bicyclic nucleosides, comprise 5′ or 3′-terminal groups such as one or more unmodified nucleosides.
  • As used herein the term “hemimer motif” refers to an oligomeric compound comprising a contiguous sequence of monomer subunits that each have the same type of sugar group with a further short contiguous sequence of monomer subunits located at the 5′ or the 3′ end that have a different type of sugar group. The heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position. The motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups. In general, a hemimer is an oligomeric compound of uniform sugar groups further comprising a short region (1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomer subunits) having uniform but different sugar groups located on either the 3′ or the 5′ end of the oligomeric compound.
  • In certain embodiments, the hemimer motif comprises a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 28 monomer subunits having one type of sugar group with from 1 to 5 or from 2 to about 5 monomer subunits having a second type of sugar group located at one of the termini. In certain embodiments, the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-12 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini. In certain embodiments, the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 8 to about 20 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-5 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini. In certain embodiments, the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 12 to about 18 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini. In certain embodiments, the hemimer is a contiguous sequence of from about 10 to about 14 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides having from 1-3 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides located at one of the termini.
  • As used herein the terms “blockmer motif” and “blockmer” refer to an oligomeric compound comprising an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits wherein the sugar groups of each monomer subunit is the same except for an interrupting internal block of contiguous monomer subunits having a different type of sugar group. The heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position of a blockmer. The motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups. A blockmer overlaps somewhat with a gapmer in the definition but typically only the monomer subunits in the block have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a blockmer and only the monomer subunits in the external regions have non-naturally occurring sugar groups in a gapmer with the remainder of monomer subunits in the blockmer or gapmer being β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides or β-D-ribonucleosides. In certain embodiments, blockmers are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
  • As used herein the term “positionally modified motif” is meant to include an otherwise contiguous sequence of monomer subunits having one type of sugar group that is interrupted with two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits having another type of sugar group. Each of the two or more regions of from 1 to about 5 contiguous monomer subunits are independently uniformly modified with respect to the type of sugar group. In certain embodiments, each of the two or more regions have the same type of sugar group. In certain embodiments, each of the two or more regions have a different type of sugar group. In certain embodiments, each of the two or more regions, independently, have the same or a different type of sugar group. The heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position of a positionally modified oligomeric compound. The motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups. In certain embodiments, positionally modified oligomeric compounds are provided comprising a sequence of from 8 to 20 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides that further includes two or three regions of from 2 to about 5 contiguous bicyclic nucleosides each. Positionally modified oligomeric compounds are distinguished from gapped motifs, hemimer motifs, blockmer motifs and alternating motifs because the pattern of regional substitution defined by any positional motif does not fit into the definition provided herein for one of these other motifs. The term positionally modified oligomeric compound includes many different specific substitution patterns.
  • As used herein the term “gapmer” or “gapped oligomeric compound” refers to an oligomeric compound having two external regions or wings and an internal region or gap. The three regions form a contiguous sequence of monomer subunits with the sugar groups of the external regions being different than the sugar groups of the internal region and wherein the sugar group of each monomer subunit within a particular region is essentially the same. In certain embodiments, each monomer subunit within a particular region has the same sugar group. When the sugar groups of the external regions are the same the gapmer is a symmetric gapmer and when the sugar group used in the 5′-external region is different from the sugar group used in the 3′-external region, the gapmer is an asymmetric gapmer. In certain embodiments, the external regions are small (each independently 1, 2, 3, 4 or about 5 monomer subunits) and the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups with the internal region comprising β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In certain embodiments, the external regions each, independently, comprise from 1 to about 5 monomer subunits having non-naturally occurring sugar groups and the internal region comprises from 6 to 18 unmodified nucleosides. The internal region or the gap generally comprises β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides but can comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups. The heterocyclic base and internucleoside linkage is independently variable at each position of a gapped oligomeric compound. The motif further optionally includes the use of one or more other groups including but not limited to capping groups, conjugate groups and other 5′ or 3′-terminal groups.
  • In certain embodiments, the gapped oligomeric compounds comprise an internal region of β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with one of the external regions comprising bicyclic nucleosides as disclosed herein. In certain embodiments, the gapped oligomeric compounds comprise an internal region of β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides with both of the external regions comprising bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided herein wherein all of the monomer subunits comprise non-naturally occurring sugar groups.
  • In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided comprising one or two bicyclic nucleosides at the 5′-end, two or three bicyclic nucleosides at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided comprising one bicyclic nucleoside at the 5′-end, two bicyclic nucleosides at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 16 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided comprising one bicyclic nucleosides at the 5′-end, two bicyclic nucleosides at the 3′-end and an internal region of from 10 to 14 β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides.
  • In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided that are from about 10 to about 21 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided that are from about 12 to about 16 monomer subunits in length. In certain embodiments, gapped oligomeric compounds are provided that are from about 12 to about 14 monomer subunits in length.
  • The terms “substituent” and “substituent group,” as used herein, are meant to include groups that are typically added to other groups or parent compounds to enhance desired properties or provide other desired effects. Substituent groups can be protected or unprotected and can be added to one available site or to many available sites in a parent compound. Substituent groups may also be further substituted with other substituent groups and may be attached directly or via a linking group such as an alkyl or hydrocarbyl group to a parent compound.
  • Substituent groups amenable herein include without limitation, halogen, hydroxyl, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, acyl (—C(O)Raa), carboxyl (—C(O)O—Raa), aliphatic groups, alicyclic groups, alkoxy, substituted oxy (—O—Raa), aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclic radical, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, amino (—N(Rbb)(Rcc)), imino(═NRbb), amido (—C(O)N(Rbb)(Rcc) or —N(Rbb)C(O)Raa), azido (—N3), nitro (—NO2), cyano (—CN), carbamido (—OC(O)N(Rbb)(Rcc) or —N(Rbb)C(O)ORaa), ureido (—N(Rbb)C(O)—N(Rbb)(Rcc)), thioureido (—N(Rbb)C(S)N(Rbb)(Rcc)), guanidinyl (—N(Rbb)C(═NRbb)N(Rbb)(Rcc)), amidinyl (—C(═NRbb)N(Rbb)(Rcc) or —N(Rbb)C(═NRbb)(Raa)), thiol (—SRbb), sulfinyl (—S(O)Rbb), sulfonyl (—S(O)2Rbb) and sulfonamidyl (—S(O)2N(Rbb)(Rcc) or —N(Rbb)S(O)2Rbb). Wherein each Raa, Rbb and Rcc is, independently, H, an optionally linked chemical functional group or a further substituent group with a preferred list including without limitation, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aliphatic, alkoxy, acyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, alicyclic, heterocyclic and heteroarylalkyl. Selected substituents within the compounds described herein are present to a recursive degree.
  • In this context, “recursive substituent” means that a substituent may recite another instance of itself. Because of the recursive nature of such substituents, theoretically, a large number may be present in any given claim. One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal chemistry and organic chemistry understands that the total number of such substituents is reasonably limited by the desired properties of the compound intended. Such properties include, by way of example and not limitation, physical properties such as molecular weight, solubility or log P, application properties such as activity against the intended target and practical properties such as ease of synthesis.
  • Recursive substituents are an intended aspect of the invention. One of ordinary skill in the art of medicinal and organic chemistry understands the versatility of such substituents. To the degree that recursive substituents are present in a claim of the invention, the total number will be determined as set forth above.
  • The terms “stable compound” and “stable structure” as used herein are meant to indicate a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into an efficacious therapeutic agent. Only stable compounds are contemplated herein.
  • The term “alkyl,” as used herein, refers to a saturated straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms. Examples of alkyl groups include without limitation, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isopropyl, n-hexyl, octyl, decyl, dodecyl and the like. Alkyl groups typically include from 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms (C1-C12 alkyl) with from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred. The term “lower alkyl” as used herein includes from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms. Alkyl groups as used herein may optionally include one or more further substituent groups.
  • The term “alkenyl,” as used herein, refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms and having at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Examples of alkenyl groups include without limitation, ethenyl, propenyl, butenyl, 1-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, dienes such as 1,3-butadiene and the like. Alkenyl groups typically include from 2 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 2 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred. Alkenyl groups as used herein may optionally include one or more further substituent groups.
  • The term “alkynyl,” as used herein, refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms and having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. Examples of alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl, 1-propynyl, 1-butynyl, and the like. Alkynyl groups typically include from 2 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 2 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 2 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred. Alkynyl groups as used herein may optionally include one or more further substituent groups.
  • The term “acyl,” as used herein, refers to a radical formed by removal of a hydroxyl group from an organic acid and has the general formula —C(O)—X where X is typically aliphatic, alicyclic or aromatic. Examples include aliphatic carbonyls, aromatic carbonyls, aliphatic sulfonyls, aromatic sulfinyls, aliphatic sulfinyls, aromatic phosphates, aliphatic phosphates and the like. Acyl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • The term “alicyclic” refers to a cyclic ring system wherein the ring is aliphatic. The ring system can comprise one or more rings wherein at least one ring is aliphatic. Preferred alicyclics include rings having from about 5 to about 9 carbon atoms in the ring. Alicyclic as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • The term “aliphatic,” as used herein, refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon radical containing up to twenty four carbon atoms wherein the saturation between any two carbon atoms is a single, double or triple bond. An aliphatic group preferably contains from 1 to about 24 carbon atoms, more typically from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms with from 1 to about 6 carbon atoms being more preferred. The straight or branched chain of an aliphatic group may be interrupted with one or more heteroatoms that include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus. Such aliphatic groups interrupted by heteroatoms include without limitation, polyalkoxys, such as polyalkylene glycols, polyamines, and polyimines. Aliphatic groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • The term “alkoxy,” as used herein, refers to a radical formed between an alkyl group and an oxygen atom wherein the oxygen atom is used to attach the alkoxy group to a parent molecule. Examples of alkoxy groups include without limitation, methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, neopentoxy, n-hexoxy and the like. Alkoxy groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • The term “aminoalkyl” as used herein, refers to an amino substituted C1-C12 alkyl radical. The alkyl portion of the radical forms a covalent bond with a parent molecule. The amino group can be located at any position and the aminoalkyl group can be substituted with a further substituent group at the alkyl and/or amino portions.
  • The terms “aralkyl” and “arylalkyl,” as used herein, refer to an aromatic group that is covalently linked to a C1-C12 alkyl radical. The alkyl radical portion of the resulting aralkyl (or arylalkyl) group forms a covalent bond with a parent molecule. Examples include without limitation, benzyl, phenethyl and the like. Aralkyl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups attached to the alkyl, the aryl or both groups that form the radical group.
  • The terms “aryl” and “aromatic,” as used herein, refer to a mono- or polycyclic carbocyclic ring system radicals having one or more aromatic rings. Examples of aryl groups include without limitation, phenyl, naphthyl, tetrahydronaphthyl, indanyl, idenyl and the like. Preferred aryl ring systems have from about 5 to about 20 carbon atoms in one or more rings. Aryl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • The terms “halo” and “halogen,” as used herein, refer to an atom selected from fluorine, chlorine, bromine and iodine.
  • The terms “heteroaryl,” and “heteroaromatic,” as used herein, refer to a radical comprising a mono- or poly-cyclic aromatic ring, ring system or fused ring system wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic and includes one or more heteroatoms. Heteroaryl is also meant to include fused ring systems including systems where one or more of the fused rings contain no heteroatoms. Heteroaryl groups typically include one ring atom selected from sulfur, nitrogen or oxygen. Examples of heteroaryl groups include without limitation, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, oxazolyl, isooxazolyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, thiophenyl, furanyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzooxazolyl, quinoxalinyl and the like. Heteroaryl radicals can be attached to a parent molecule directly or through a linking moiety such as an aliphatic group or hetero atom. Heteroaryl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • The term “heteroarylalkyl,” as used herein, refers to a heteroaryl group as previously defined that further includes a covalently attached C1-C12 alkyl radical. The alkyl radical portion of the resulting heteroarylalkyl group is capable of forming a covalent bond with a parent molecule. Examples include without limitation, pyridinylmethyl, pyrimidinylethyl, napthyridinylpropyl and the like. Heteroarylalkyl groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups on one or both of the heteroaryl or alkyl portions.
  • The term “heterocyclic radical” as used herein, refers to a radical mono-, or poly-cyclic ring system that includes at least one heteroatom and is unsaturated, partially saturated or fully saturated, thereby including heteroaryl groups. Heterocyclic is also meant to include fused ring systems wherein one or more of the fused rings contain at least one heteroatom and the other rings can contain one or more heteroatoms or optionally contain no heteroatoms. A heterocyclic radical typically includes at least one atom selected from sulfur, nitrogen or oxygen. Examples of heterocyclic radicals include, [1,3]dioxolanyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, piperidinyl, piperazinyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, morpholinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, quinoxalinyl, pyridazinonyl, tetrahydrofuryl and the like. Heterocyclic groups as used herein may optionally include further substituent groups.
  • The term “hydrocarbyl” includes radical groups that comprise C, O and H. Included are straight, branched and cyclic groups having any degree of saturation. Such hydrocarbyl groups can include one or more heteroatoms selected from N, O and S and can be further mono or poly substituted with one or more substituent groups.
  • The term “mono or poly cyclic structure” as used herein includes all ring systems selected from single or polycyclic radical ring systems wherein the rings are fused or linked and is meant to be inclusive of single and mixed ring systems individually selected from aliphatic, alicyclic, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, arylalkyl, heterocyclic, heteroaryl, heteroaromatic and heteroarylalkyl. Such mono and poly cyclic structures can contain rings that each have the same level of saturation or each, independently, have varying degrees of saturation including fully saturated, partially saturated or fully unsaturated. Each ring can comprise ring atoms selected from C, N, O and S to give rise to heterocyclic rings as well as rings comprising only C ring atoms which can be present in a mixed motif such as for example benzimidazole wherein one ring has only carbon ring atoms and the fused ring has two nitrogen atoms. The mono or poly cyclic structures can be further substituted with substituent groups such as for example phthalimide which has two ═O groups attached to one of the rings. Mono or poly cyclic structures can be attached to parent molecules using various strategies such as directly through a ring atom, through a substituent group or through a bifunctional linking moiety.
  • The term “oxo” refers to the group (═O).
  • Linking groups or bifunctional linking moieties such as those known in the art are useful for attachment of chemical functional groups, conjugate groups, reporter groups and other groups to selective sites in a parent compound such as for example an oligomeric compound. In general, a bifunctional linking moiety comprises a hydrocarbyl moiety having two functional groups. One of the functional groups is selected to bind to a parent molecule or compound of interest and the other is selected to bind to essentially any selected group such as a chemical functional group or a conjugate group. In some embodiments, the linker comprises a chain structure or a polymer of repeating units such as ethylene glycols or amino acid units. Examples of functional groups that are routinely used in bifunctional linking moieties include without limitation, electrophiles for reacting with nucleophilic groups and nucleophiles for reacting with electrophilic groups. In some embodiments, bifunctional linking moieties include amino, hydroxyl, carboxylic acid, thiol, unsaturations (e.g., double or triple bonds), and the like. Some nonlimiting examples of bifunctional linking moieties include 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanoic acid (ADO), succinimidyl 4-(N-maleimidomethyl) cyclohexane-1-carboxylate (SMCC) and 6-aminohexanoic acid (AHEX or AHA). Other linking groups include without limitation, substituted C1-C10 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-C10 alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted C2-C10 alkynyl, wherein a nonlimiting list of preferred substituent groups includes hydroxyl, amino, alkoxy, carboxy, benzyl, phenyl, nitro, thiol, thioalkoxy, halogen, alkyl, aryl, alkenyl and alkynyl.
  • In certain embodiments, the oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be modified by covalent attachment of one or more conjugate groups. In general, conjugate groups modify one or more properties of the oligomeric compounds they are attached to. Such oligonucleotide properties include without limitation, pharmacodynamics, pharmacokinetics, binding, absorption, cellular distribution, cellular uptake, charge and clearance. Conjugate groups are routinely used in the chemical arts and are linked directly or via an optional linking moiety or linking group to a parent compound such as an oligomeric compound. A preferred list of conjugate groups includes without limitation, intercalators, reporter molecules, polyamines, polyamides, polyethylene glycols, thioethers, polyethers, cholesterols, thiocholesterols, cholic acid moieties, folate, lipids, phospholipids, biotin, phenazine, phenanthridine, anthraquinone, adamantane, acridine, fluoresceins, rhodamines, coumarins and dyes.
  • In certain embodiments, the oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be modified by covalent attachment of one or more 5′ or 3′-terminal groups. The terms “5′ or 3′-terminal groups”, “5-terminal group” and “3′-terminal group” as used herein are meant to include useful groups known to the art skilled that can be placed on one or both of the 5′ and 3′-ends of an oligomeric compound respectively, for various purposes such as enabling the tracking of the oligomeric compound (a fluorescent label or other reporter group), improving the pharmacokinetics or pharmacodynamics of the oligomeric compound (such as for example: uptake and/or delivery) or enhancing one or more other desirable properties of the oligomeric compound (a group for improving nuclease stability or binding affinity). In certain embodiments, 5′ and 3′-terminal groups include without limitation, modified or unmodified nucleosides; two or more linked nucleosides that are independently, modified or unmodified; conjugate groups; capping groups; phosphate moieties; and protecting groups.
  • The term “phosphate moiety” as used herein, refers to a terminal phosphate group that includes phosphates as well as modified phosphates. The phosphate moiety can be located at either terminus but is preferred at the 5′-terminal nucleoside. In one aspect, the terminal phosphate is unmodified having the formula —O—P(═O)(OH)OH. In another aspect, the terminal phosphate is modified such that one or more of the O and OH groups are replaced with H, O, S, N(R) or alkyl where R is H, an amino protecting group or unsubstituted or substituted alkyl. In certain embodiments, the 5′ and or 3′ terminal group can comprise from 1 to 3 phosphate moieties that are each, independently, unmodified (di or tri-phosphates) or modified.
  • As used herein, the term “phosphorus moiety” refers to a group having the formula:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00023
  • wherein:
  • Ra and Rc are each, independently, OH, SH, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
  • Rb is O or S.
  • Phosphorus moieties included herein can be attached to a monomer, which can be used in the preparation of oligomeric compounds, wherein the monomer may be attached using O, S, NRd or CReRf, wherein Rd includes without limitation H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy, C2-C6 alkenyl, substituted C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, substituted C2-C6 alkynyl or substituted acyl, and Re and Rf each, independently, include without limitation H, halogen, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy or substituted C1-C6 alkoxy. Such linked phosphorus moieties include without limitation, phosphates, modified phosphates, thiophosphates, modified thiophosphates, phosphonates, modified phosphonates, phosphoramidates and modified phosphoramidates.
  • The term “protecting group,” as used herein, refers to a labile chemical moiety which is known in the art to protect reactive groups including without limitation, hydroxyl, amino and thiol groups, against undesired reactions during synthetic procedures. Protecting groups are typically used selectively and/or orthogonally to protect sites during reactions at other reactive sites and can then be removed to leave the unprotected group as is or available for further reactions. Protecting groups as known in the art are described generally in Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 4th edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2007.
  • Groups can be selectively incorporated into oligomeric compounds as provided herein as precursors. For example an amino group can be placed into a compound as provided herein as an azido group that can be chemically converted to the amino group at a desired point in the synthesis. Generally, groups are protected or present as precursors that will be inert to reactions that modify other areas of the parent molecule for conversion into their final groups at an appropriate time. Further representative protecting or precursor groups are discussed in Agrawal et al., Protocols for Oligonucleotide Conjugates, Humana Press; New Jersey, 1994, 26, 1-72.
  • The term “orthogonally protected” refers to functional groups which are protected with different classes of protecting groups, wherein each class of protecting group can be removed in any order and in the presence of all other classes (see, Barany et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1977, 99, 7363-7365; Barany et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1980, 102, 3084-3095). Orthogonal protection is widely used in for example automated oligonucleotide synthesis. A functional group is deblocked in the presence of one or more other protected functional groups which is not affected by the deblocking procedure. This deblocked functional group is reacted in some manner and at some point a further orthogonal protecting group is removed under a different set of reaction conditions. This allows for selective chemistry to arrive at a desired compound or oligomeric compound.
  • Examples of hydroxyl protecting groups include without limitation, acetyl, t-butyl, t-butoxymethyl, methoxymethyl, tetrahydropyranyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, 1-(2-chloroethoxyl)ethyl, p-chlorophenyl, 2,4-dinitrophenyl, benzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, diphenylmethyl, p-nitrobenzyl, bis(2-acetoxyethoxy)methyl (ACE), 2-trimethylsilylethyl, trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, triphenylsilyl, [(triisopropylsilyl)oxy]methyl (TOM), benzoylformate, chloroacetyl, trichloroacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, pivaloyl, benzoyl, p-phenylbenzoyl, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbonate, mesylate, tosylate, triphenylmethyl (trityl), monomethoxytrityl, dimethoxytrityl (DMT), trimethoxytrityl, 1(2-fluorophenyl)-4-methoxypiperidin-4-yl (FPMP), 9-phenylxanthine-9-yl (Pixyl) and 9-(p-methoxyphenyl)xanthine-9-yl (MOX). Wherein more commonly used hydroxyl protecting groups include without limitation, benzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, t-butyldimethylsilyl, t-butyldiphenylsilyl, benzoyl, mesylate, tosylate, dimethoxytrityl (DMT), 9-phenylxanthine-9-yl (Pixyl) and 9-(p-methoxyphenyl)xanthine-9-yl (MOX).
  • Examples of amino protecting groups include without limitation, carbamate-protecting groups, such as 2-trimethylsilylethoxycarbonyl (Teoc), 1-methyl-1-(4-biphenylyl)ethoxycarbonyl (Bpoc), t-butoxycarbonyl (BOC), allyloxycarbonyl (Alloc), 9-fluorenylmethyloxycarbonyl (Fmoc), and benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz); amide-protecting groups, such as formyl, acetyl, trihaloacetyl, benzoyl, and nitrophenylacetyl; sulfonamide-protecting groups, such as 2-nitrobenzenesulfonyl; and imine- and cyclic imide-protecting groups, such as phthalimido and dithiasuccinoyl.
  • Examples of thiol protecting groups include without limitation, triphenylmethyl (trityl), benzyl (Bn), and the like.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be prepared having one or more optionally protected phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages. Representative protecting groups for phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages such as phosphodiester and phosphorothioate linkages include β-cyanoethyl, diphenylsilylethyl, δ-cyanobutenyl, cyano p-xylyl (CPX), N-methyl-N-trifluoroacetyl ethyl (META), acetoxy phenoxy ethyl (APE) and butene-4-yl groups. See for example U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,725,677 and Re. 34,069 (β-cyanoethyl); Beaucage et al., Tetrahedron, 1993, 49(10), 1925-1963; Beaucage et al., Tetrahedron, 1993, 49(46), 10441-10488; Beaucage et al., Tetrahedron, 1992, 48(12), 2223-2311.
  • In certain embodiments, compounds having reactive phosphorus groups are provided that are useful for forming internucleoside linkages including for example phosphodiester and phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages. Such reactive phosphorus groups are known in the art and contain phosphorus atoms in PIII or PV valence state including, but not limited to, phosphoramidite, H-phosphonate, phosphate triesters and phosphorus containing chiral auxiliaries. In certain embodiments, reactive phosphorus groups are selected from diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite (—O*—P[N[(CH(CH3)2]2]O(CH2)2CN) and H-phosphonate (—O*—P(═O)(H)OH), wherein the O* is provided from the Markush group for the monomer. A preferred synthetic solid phase synthesis utilizes phosphoramidites (PIII chemistry) as reactive phosphites. The intermediate phosphite compounds are subsequently oxidized to the phosphate or thiophosphate (PV chemistry) using known methods to yield, phosphodiester or phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages. Additional reactive phosphates and phosphites are disclosed in Tetrahedron Report Number 309 (Beaucage and Iyer, Tetrahedron, 1992, 48, 2223-2311).
  • As used herein the term “internucleoside linkage” or “internucleoside linking group” is meant to include all manner of internucleoside linking groups known in the art including but not limited to, phosphorus containing internucleoside linking groups such as phosphodiester and phosphorothioate, and non-phosphorus containing internucleoside linking groups such as formacetyl and methyleneimino. Internucleoside linkages also includes neutral non-ionic internucleoside linkages such as amide-3 (3′-CH2—C(═O)—N(H)-5′), amide-4 (3′-CH2—N(H)—C(═O)-5′) and methylphosphonate wherein a phosphorus atom is not always present.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be prepared having one or more internucleoside linkages containing modified e.g. non-naturally occurring internucleoside linkages. The two main classes of internucleoside linkages are defined by the presence or absence of a phosphorus atom. Modified internucleoside linkages having a phosphorus atom include without limitation, phosphorothioates, chiral phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, phosphotriesters, aminoalkylphosphotriesters, methyl and other alkyl phosphonates including 3′-alkylene phosphonates, 5′-alkylene phosphonates and chiral phosphonates, phosphinates, phosphoramidates including 3′-amino phosphoramidate and aminoalkylphosphoramidates, thionophosphoramidates, thionoalkylphosphonates, thionoalkylphosphotriesters, selenophosphates and boranophosphates having normal 3′-5′ linkages, 2′-5′ linked analogs of these, and those having inverted polarity wherein one or more internucleotide linkages is a 3′ to 3′, 5′ to 5′ or 2′ to 2′ linkage. Oligonucleotides having inverted polarity can comprise a single 3′ to 3′ linkage at the 3′-most internucleotide linkage i.e. a single inverted nucleoside residue which may be abasic (the nucleobase is missing or has a hydroxyl group in place thereof). Various salts, mixed salts and free acid forms are also included.
  • Representative U.S. patents that teach the preparation of the above phosphorus containing linkages include without limitation, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,687,808; 4,469,863; 4,476,301; 5,023,243; 5,177,196; 5,188,897; 5,194,599; 5,264,423; 5,276,019; 5,278,302; 5,286,717; 5,321,131; 5,399,676; 5,405,939; 5,453,496; 5,455,233; 5,466,677; 5,476,925; 5,519,126; 5,527,899; 5,536,821; 5,541,306; 5,550,111; 5,563,253; 5,565,555; 5,571,799; 5,587,361; 5,625,050; 5,672,697 and 5,721,218, certain of which are commonly owned with this application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds as provided herein can be prepared having one or more non-phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages. Such oligomeric compounds include without limitation, those that are formed by short chain alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, mixed heteroatom and alkyl or cycloalkyl internucleoside linkages, or one or more short chain heteroatomic or heterocyclic internucleoside linkages. These include those having siloxane backbones; sulfide, sulfoxide and sulfone backbones; formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; methylene formacetyl and thioformacetyl backbones; riboacetyl backbones; alkene containing backbones; sulfamate backbones; methyleneimino and methylenehydrazino backbones; sulfonate and sulfonamide backbones; amide backbones; and others having mixed N, O, S and CH2 component parts.
  • Representative U.S. patents that teach the preparation of the above oligonucleosides include without limitation, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,034,506; 5,166,315; 5,185,444; 5,214,134; 5,216,141; 5,235,033; 5,264,562; 5,264,564; 5,405,938; 5,434,257; 5,466,677; 5,470,967; 5,489,677; 5,541,307; 5,561,225; 5,596,086; 5,602,240; 5,608,046; 5,610,289; 5,618,704; 5,623,070; 5,663,312; 5,633,360; 5,677,437; 5,677,439; 5,646,269 and 5,792,608, certain of which are commonly owned with this application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference.
  • As used herein the phrase “neutral internucleoside linkage” is intended to include internucleoside linkages that are non-ionic. Neutral internucleoside linkages include without limitation, phosphotriesters, methylphosphonates, MMI (3′-CH2—N(CH3)—O-5′), amide-3 (3′-CH2—C(═O)—N(H)-5′), amide-4 (3′-CH2—N(H)—C(═O)-5′), formacetal (3′-O—CH2—O-5′), and thioformacetal (3′-S—CH2—O-5′). Further neutral internucleoside linkages include nonionic linkages comprising siloxane (dialkylsiloxane), carboxylate ester, carboxamide, sulfide, sulfonate ester and amides (See for example: Carbohydrate Modifications in Antisense Research; Y. S. Sanghvi and P. D. Cook, Eds., ACS Symposium Series 580; Chapters 3 and 4, 40-65). Further neutral internucleoside linkages include nonionic linkages comprising mixed N, O, S and CH2 component parts.
  • The bicyclic nucleosides provided herein can be prepared by any of the applicable techniques of organic synthesis, as, for example, illustrated in the examples below. Many such techniques are well known in the art. However, many of the known techniques are elaborated in Compendium of Organic Synthetic Methods, John Wiley & Sons, New York: Vol. 1, Ian T. Harrison and Shuyen Harrison, 1971; Vol. 2, Ian T. Harrison and Shuyen Harrison, 1974; Vol. 3, Louis S. Hegedus and Leroy Wade, 1977; Vol. 4, Leroy G. Wade Jr., 1980; Vol. 5, Leroy G. Wade Jr., 1984; and Vol. 6, Michael B. Smith; as well as March, J., Advanced Organic Chemistry, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1985; Comprehensive Organic Synthesis. Selectivity, Strategy & Efficiency in Modern Organic Chemistry, in 9 Volumes, Barry M. Trost, Editor-in-Chief, Pergamon Press, New York, 1993; Advanced Organic Chemistry, Part B: Reactions and Synthesis, 4th Edition; Carey and Sundberg, Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers, New York, 2001; Advanced Organic Chemistry, Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure, 2nd Edition, March, McGraw Hill, 1977; Greene, T. W., and Wutz, P. G. M., Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, 4th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991; and Larock, R. C., Comprehensive Organic Transformations, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1999.
  • The compounds described herein contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, and other stereoisomeric forms that may be defined, in terms of absolute stereochemistry, as (R)- or (S)-, a or B, or as (D)- or (L)- such as for amino acids. Included herein are all such possible isomers, as well as their racemic and optically pure forms. Optical isomers may be prepared from their respective optically active precursors by the procedures described above, or by resolving the racemic mixtures. The resolution can be carried out in the presence of a resolving agent, by chromatography or by repeated crystallization or by some combination of these techniques which are known to those skilled in the art. Further details regarding resolutions can be found in Jacques, et al., Enantiomers, Racemates, and Resolutions, John Wiley & Sons, 1981. When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds, other unsaturation, or other centers of geometric asymmetry, and unless specified otherwise, it is intended that the compounds include both E and Z geometric isomers or cis- and trans-isomers. Likewise, all tautomeric forms are also intended to be included. The configuration of any carbon-carbon double bond appearing herein is selected for convenience only and is not intended to limit a particular configuration unless the text so states.
  • As is known in the art, a nucleoside is a base-sugar combination. The base portion of the nucleoside is normally a heterocyclic base moiety. The two most common classes of such heterocyclic bases are purines and pyrimidines. Nucleotides are nucleosides that further include a phosphate group covalently linked to the sugar portion of the nucleoside. For those nucleosides that include a pentofuranosyl sugar, the phosphate group can be linked to either the 2′, 3′ or 5′ hydroxyl moiety of the sugar. In forming oligonucleotides, the phosphate groups covalently link adjacent nucleosides to one another to form a linear polymeric compound. The respective ends of this linear polymeric structure can be joined to form a circular structure by hybridization or by formation of a covalent bond. However, open linear structures are generally desired. Within the oligonucleotide structure, the phosphate groups are commonly referred to as forming the internucleoside linkages of the oligonucleotide. The normal internucleoside linkage of RNA and DNA is a 3′ to 5′ phosphodiester linkage.
  • The term “nucleotide mimetic” as used herein is meant to include monomers that incorporate into oligomeric compounds with sugar and linkage surrogate groups, such as for example peptide nucleic acids (PNA) or morpholinos (linked by —N(H)—C(═O)—O—). In general, the heterocyclic base at each position is maintained for hybridization to a nucleic acid target but the sugar and linkage is replaced with surrogate groups that are expected to function similar to native groups but have one or more enhanced properties.
  • As used herein the term “nucleoside mimetic” is intended to include those structures used to replace the sugar and the base at one or more positions of an oligomeric compound. Examples of nucleoside mimetics include without limitation replacement of the heterocyclic base moiety with a mimetic thereof such as a phenoxazine moiety (for example the 9-(2-aminoethoxy)-1,3-diazaphenoxazine-2-one group, also referred to as a G-clamp which forms four hydrogen bonds when hybridized with a guanosine base) and further replacement of the sugar group with a group such as for example a morpholino, a cyclohexenyl or a bicyclo[3.1.0]hexyl.
  • As used herein the term “modified nucleoside” is meant to include all manner of modified nucleosides that can be incorporated into an oligomeric compound using oligomer synthesis. The term is intended to include modifications made to a nucleoside such as modified stereochemical configurations, one or more substitutions, and deletion of groups as opposed to the use of surrogate groups which are described elsewhere herein. The term includes nucleosides having a furanose sugar (or 4′-S analog) portion and can include a heterocyclic base or can include an abasic site. One group of representative modified nucleosides includes without limitation, substituted nucleosides (such as 2′, 5′, and/or 4′ substituted nucleosides) 4′-S-modified nucleosides, (such as 4′-S-ribonucleosides, 4′-S-2′-deoxyribonucleosides and 4′-S-2′-substituted ribonucleosides), bicyclic modified nucleosides (such as for example, bicyclic nucleosides wherein the sugar group has a 2′-O—CHRa-4′ bridging group, wherein Ra is H, alkyl or substituted alkyl) and base modified nucleosides. The sugar can be modified with more than one of these modifications listed such as for example a bicyclic modified nucleoside further including a 5′-substitution or a 5′ or 4′ substituted nucleoside further including a 2′ substituent. The term modified nucleoside also includes combinations of these modifications such as a base and sugar modified nucleosides. These modifications are meant to be illustrative and not exhaustive as other modifications are known in the art and are also envisioned as possible modifications for the modified nucleosides described herein.
  • As used herein the term “monomer subunit” is meant to include all manner of monomer units that are amenable to oligomer synthesis with one preferred list including monomer subunits such as β-D-ribonucleosides, β-D-2′-deoxyribnucleosides, modified nucleosides, including substituted nucleosides (such as 2′, 5′ and bis substituted nucleosides), 4′-S-modified nucleosides, (such as 4′-S-ribonucleosides, 4′-S-2′-deoxyribonucleosides and 4′-S-2′-substituted ribonucleosides), bicyclic modified nucleosides (such as bicyclic nucleosides wherein the sugar group has a 2′-O—CHRa-4′ bridging group, wherein Ra is H, alkyl or substituted alkyl), other modified nucleosides, nucleoside mimetics, nucleosides having sugar surrogates and the bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein.
  • The term “oligonucleotide” refers to an oligomer or polymer of ribonucleic acid (RNA) or deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA). This term includes oligonucleotides composed of naturally-occurring nucleobases, sugars and covalent internucleoside linkages. The term “oligonucleotide analog” refers to oligonucleotides that have one or more non-naturally occurring portions. Such non-naturally occurring oligonucleotides are often desired over naturally occurring forms because of desirable properties such as, for example, enhanced cellular uptake, enhanced affinity for nucleic acid target and/or increased stability in the presence of nucleases.
  • The term “oligonucleoside” refers to a sequence of nucleosides that are joined by internucleoside linkages that do not have phosphorus atoms. Internucleoside linkages of this type include short chain alkyl, cycloalkyl, mixed heteroatom alkyl, mixed heteroatom cycloalkyl, one or more short chain heteroatomic and one or more short chain heterocyclic. These internucleoside linkages include without limitation, siloxane, sulfide, sulfoxide, sulfone, acetyl, formacetyl, thioformacetyl, methylene formacetyl, thioformacetyl, alkeneyl, sulfamate, methyleneimino, methylenehydrazino, sulfonate, sulfonamide, amide and others having mixed N, O, S and CH2 component parts.
  • The terms “heterocyclic base moiety” and “nucleobase” as used herein, include unmodified or naturally occurring nucleobases, modified or non-naturally occurring nucleobases as well as synthetic mimetics thereof (such as for example phenoxazines). In general, a heterocyclic base moiety is heterocyclic system that contains one or more atoms or groups of atoms capable of hydrogen bonding to a base of a nucleic acid.
  • As used herein the terms, “unmodified nucleobase” and “naturally occurring nucleobase” include the purine bases adenine (A) and guanine (G), and the pyrimidine bases thymine (T), cytosine (C) and uracil (U). Modified nucleobases include other synthetic and natural nucleobases such as 5-methylcytosine (5-me-C), 5-hydroxymethyl cytosine, xanthine, hypoxanthine, 2-aminoadenine, 6-methyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-propyl and other alkyl derivatives of adenine and guanine, 2-thiouracil, 2-thiothymine and 2-thiocytosine, 5-halouracil and cytosine, 5-propynyl (—C≡C—CH3) uracil and cytosine and other alkynyl derivatives of pyrimidine bases, 6-azo uracil, cytosine and thymine, 5-uracil (pseudouracil), 4-thiouracil, 8-halo, 8-amino, 8-thiol, 8-thioalkyl, 8-hydroxyl and other 8-substituted adenines and guanines, 5-halo particularly 5-bromo, 5-trifluoromethyl and other 5-substituted uracils and cytosines, 7-methylguanine and 7-methyladenine, 2-F-adenine, 2-amino-adenine, 8-azaguanine and 8-azaadenine, 7-deazaguanine and 7-deazaadenine, 3-deazaguanine and 3-deazaadenine, universal bases, hydrophobic bases, promiscuous bases, size-expanded bases, and fluorinated bases as defined herein. Further modified nucleobases include tricyclic pyrimidines such as phenoxazine cytidine([5,4-b][1,4]benzoxazin-2(3H)-one), phenothiazine cytidine (1H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1,4]benzothiazin-2(3H)-one), G-clamps such as a substituted phenoxazine cytidine (e.g. 9-(2-aminoethoxy)-H-pyrimido[5,4-b][1,4]benzoxazin-2(3H)-one), carbazole cytidine (2H-pyrimido[4,5-b]indol-2-one), pyridoindole cytidine (H-pyrido[3′,2′:4,5]pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidin-2-one). Modified nucleobases may also include those in which the purine or pyrimidine base is replaced with other heterocycles, for example 7-deaza-adenine, 7-deazaguanosine, 2-aminopyridine and 2-pyridone. Further nucleobases include those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,687,808, those disclosed in The Concise Encyclopedia Of Polymer Science And Engineering, Kroschwitz, J. I., Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1990, 858-859; those disclosed by Englisch et al., Angewandte Chemie, International Edition, 1991, 30, 613; and those disclosed by Sanghvi, Y. S., Chapter 15, Antisense Research and Applications, Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., Eds., CRC Press, 1993, 273-288.
  • The heterocyclic base moiety of each of the bicyclic nucleosides can be modified with one or more substituent groups to enhance one or more properties such as affinity for a target strand or affect some other property in an advantageous manner. Modified nucleobases include without limitation, universal bases, hydrophobic bases, promiscuous bases, size-expanded bases, and fluorinated bases as defined herein. Certain of these nucleobases are particularly useful for increasing the binding affinity of the oligomeric compounds as provided herein. These include 5-substituted pyrimidines, 6-azapyrimidines and N-2, N-6 and 0-6 substituted purines, including 2-aminopropyladenine, 5-propynyluracil and 5-propynylcytosine. 5-methylcytosine substitutions have been shown to increase nucleic acid duplex stability by 0.6-1.2° C. (Antisense Research and Applications, Sanghvi, Y. S., Crooke, S. T. and Lebleu, B., Eds., CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1993, 276-278).
  • Representative United States patents that teach the preparation of certain of the above noted modified nucleobases as well as other modified nucleobases include without limitation, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,687,808; 4,845,205; 5,130,302; 5,134,066; 5,175,273; 5,367,066; 5,432,272; 5,457,187; 5,459,255; 5,484,908; 5,502,177; 5,525,711; 5,552,540; 5,587,469; 5,594,121; 5,596,091; 5,614,617; 5,645,985; 5,681,941; 5,750,692; 5,763,588; 5,830,653 and 6,005,096, certain of which are commonly owned with the instant application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • In general, the term “oligomeric compound” refers to a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits. In general, each linked monomer subunit is directly or indirectly attached to a heterocyclic base moiety but abasic sites are also possible. At least some and generally most if not essentially all of the heterocyclic bases in an oligomeric compound are capable of hybridizing to a nucleic acid molecule, normally a preselected RNA target. The term “oligomeric compound” therefore includes oligonucleotides, oligonucleotide analogs and oligonucleosides. It also includes polymers having a plurality of non-naturally occurring nucleoside mimetics and or nucleosides having sugar surrogate groups. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds comprise a plurality of monomer subunits independently selected from naturally occurring nucleosides, non-naturally occurring nucleosides, modified nucleosides, nucleoside mimetics, and nucleosides having sugar surrogate groups.
  • When preparing oligomeric compounds having specific motifs as disclosed herein it can be advantageous to mix non-naturally occurring monomer subunits such as the bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein with other non-naturally occurring monomer subunits, naturally occurring monomer subunits (nucleosides) or mixtures thereof. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided herein comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits wherein at least one monomer subunit is a bicyclic nucleoside as provided herein. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided comprising a plurality of bicyclic nucleosides as provided herein.
  • Oligomeric compounds are routinely prepared linearly but can also be joined or otherwise prepared to be circular and/or can be prepared to include branching. Oligomeric compounds can form double stranded constructs such as for example two strands hybridized to form a double stranded composition. Double stranded compositions can be linked or separate and can include various other groups such as conjugates and/or overhangs on the ends.
  • Oligomeric compounds provided herein can optionally contain one or more nucleosides wherein the sugar group has been modified. Such sugar modified nucleosides may impart enhanced nuclease stability, increased binding affinity or some other beneficial biological property to the oligomeric compounds. As used herein the term “modified sugar” refers to modifications that can be made to the furanose sugar portion of otherwise unmodified or modified nucleosides useful herein. Such modified sugars include without limitation substitution with one or more substituent groups, bridging of two non-geminal ring carbon atoms to form a bicyclic nucleoside or substitution of the 4′-O atom with a disubstituted methylene group [C(R)2] or a heteroatom or substituted heteroatom (NR). Modified sugar moieties can also comprise mixtures of these modifications such as for example putting a 5′-substituent group on a bicyclic nucleoside.
  • Examples of substituent groups useful for modifying sugar moieties of nucleosides include without limitation 2′-F, 2′-allyl, 2′-amino, 2′-azido, 2′-thio, 2′-O-allyl, 2′-OCF3, 2′-O—C1-C10 alkyl, 2′-O—CH3, OCF3, 2′-O—CH2CH3, 2′-O—(CH2)2CH3, 2′-O—(CH2)2—O—CH3, 2′-O(CH2)2SCH3, 2′-O—CH2—CH═CH2 (MOE), 2′-O—(CH2)3—N(Rm)(Rn), 2′-O—(CH2)2—O—N(Rm)(Rn), 2′-O—(CH2)2—O—(CH2)2—N(Rm)(Rn), 2′-O—CH2C(═O)—N(Rm)(Rn), 2′-O—CH2C(═O)—N(H)—(CH2)2—N(Rm)(Rn) and 2′-O—CH2—N(H)—C(═NRm)[N(Rm)(Rn)], 5′-vinyl, 5′-methyl (R or S) and 4′-S wherein each Rm and Rn is, independently, H, substituted or unsubstituted C1-C10 alkyl or a protecting group. Further examples of modified sugar moieties include without limitation bicyclic sugars (e.g. bicyclic nucleic acids or bicyclic nucleosides discussed below).
  • Combinations of these modifications are also provided for herein without limitation, such as 2′-F-5′-methyl substituted nucleosides (see PCT International Application WO 2008/101157 Published on Aug. 21, 2008 for other disclosed 5′,2′-bis substituted nucleosides) and replacement of the ribosyl ring oxygen atom with S and further substitution at the 2′-position (see published U.S. Patent Application US2005-0130923, published on Jun. 16, 2005) or alternatively 5′-substitution of a bicyclic nucleic acid (see PCT International Application WO 2007/134181, published on Nov. 22, 2007 wherein a 4′-CH2—O-2′ bicyclic nucleoside is further substituted at the 5′ position with a 5′-methyl or a 5′-vinyl group).
  • As used herein the terms “bicyclic nucleic acid” and “bicyclic nucleoside” refer to nucleosides wherein the sugar portion of the nucleoside is bicyclic (e.g. bicyclic sugar). In certain embodiments, a bicyclic nucleic acid comprises a nucleoside wherein the furanose ring comprises a bridge between two non-geminal ring carbon atoms. Examples of bicyclic nucleosides include without limitation nucleosides comprising a bridge between the 4′ and the 2′ ribosyl ring atoms. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein include one or more bicyclic nucleosides wherein the bridge comprises one of the formulae: 4′-(CH2)—O-2′ (LNA); 4′-(CH2)—S-2; 4′-(CH2)2—O-2′ (ENA); 4′-CH(CH3)—O-2′ and 4′-CH(CH2OCH3)—O-2′ (and analogs thereof see U.S. Pat. No. 7,399,845, issued on Jul. 15, 2008); 4′-C(CH3)(CH3)—O-2′ (and analogs thereof see published International Application WO/2009/006478, published Jan. 8, 2009); 4′-CH2—N(OCH3)-2′ (and analogs thereof see published International Application WO/2008/150729, published Dec. 11, 2008); 4′-CH2—O—N(CH3)-2′ (see published U.S. Patent Application US2004-0171570, published Sep. 2, 2004); 4′-CH2—N(R)—O-2′, wherein R is H, C1-C12 alkyl, or a protecting group (see U.S. Pat. No. 7,427,672, issued on Sep. 23, 2008); 4′-CH2—C(H)(CH3)-2′ (see Chattopadhyaya, et al., J. Org. Chem., 2009, 74, 118-134); and 4′-CH2—C(═CH2)-2′ (and analogs thereof see published International Application WO 2008/154401, published on Dec. 8, 2008). Each of the foregoing bicyclic nucleosides can be prepared having one or more stereochemical sugar configurations including for example α-L-ribofuranose and β-D-ribofuranose (see PCT international application PCT/DK98/00393, published on Mar. 25, 1999 as WO 99/14226).
  • As used herein the term “sugar surrogate” refers to replacement of the nucleoside furanose ring with a non-furanose (or 4′-substituted furanose) group with another structure such as another ring system or open system. Such structures can be as simple as a six membered ring as opposed to the five membered furanose ring or can be more complicated as is the case with the non-ring system used in peptide nucleic acid. The term is meant to include replacement of the sugar group with all manner of sugar surrogates know in the art and includes without limitation sugar surrogate groups such as morpholinos, cyclohexenyls and cyclohexitols. In most monomer subunits having a sugar surrogate group the heterocyclic base moiety is generally maintained to permit hybridization.
  • In certain embodiments, nucleosides having sugar surrogate groups include without limitation, replacement of the ribosyl ring with a surrogate ring system such as a tetrahydropyranyl ring system (also referred to as hexitol) as illustrated below:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00024
  • Many other monocyclic, bicyclic and tricyclic ring systems are known in the art and are suitable as sugar surrogates that can be used to modify nucleosides for incorporation into oligomeric compounds as provided herein (see for example review article: Leumann, Christian J.). Such ring systems can undergo various additional substitutions to further enhance their activity.
  • Some representative U.S. patents that teach the preparation of such modified sugars include without limitation, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,981,957; 5,118,800; 5,319,080; 5,359,044; 5,393,878; 5,446,137; 5,466,786; 5,514,785; 5,519,134; 5,567,811; 5,576,427; 5,591,722; 5,597,909; 5,610,300; 5,627,053; 5,639,873; 5,646,265; 5,670,633; 5,700,920; 5,792,847 and 6,600,032 and International Application PCT/US2005/019219, filed Jun. 2, 2005 and published as WO 2005/121371 on Dec. 22, 2005 certain of which are commonly owned with the instant application, and each of which is herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • Those skilled in the art, having possession of the present disclosure will be able to prepare oligomeric compounds, comprising a contiguous sequence of linked monomer subunits, of essentially any viable length to practice the methods disclosed herein. Such oligomeric compounds will include at least one and preferably a plurality of the bicyclic nucleosides provided herein and may also include other monomer subunits including but not limited to nucleosides, modified nucleosides, nucleosides comprising sugar surrogate groups and nucleoside mimetics.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to about 80 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, or 80 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to 40 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39 or 40 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to 20 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 8 to 16 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 10 to 14 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 10, 11, 12, 13 or 14 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 10 to 18 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 10 to 21 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or 21 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 12 to 14 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 12, 13 or 14 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 12 to 18 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 12 to 21 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 or 21 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein comprise from about 14 to 18 monomer subunits in length. One having ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that this embodies oligomeric compounds of 14, 15, 16, 17 or 18 monomer subunits in length, or any range therewithin.
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds of any of a variety of ranges of lengths of linked monomer subunits are provided. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided consisting of X—Y linked monomer subunits, where X and Y are each independently selected from 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, and 50; provided that X<Y. For example, in certain embodiments, this provides oligomeric compounds comprising: 8-9, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 8-13, 8-14, 8-15, 8-16, 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, 8-20, 8-21, 8-22, 8-23, 8-24, 8-25, 8-26, 8-27, 8-28, 8-29, 8-30, 9-10, 9-11, 9-12, 9-13, 9-14, 9-15, 9-16, 9-17, 9-18, 9-19, 9-20, 9-21, 9-22, 9-23, 9-24, 9-25, 9-26, 9-27, 9-28, 9-29, 9-30, 10-11, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18, 10-19, 10-20, 10-21, 10-22, 10-23, 10-24, 10-25, 10-26, 10-27, 10-28, 10-29, 10-30, 11-12, 11-13, 11-14, 11-15, 11-16, 11-17, 11-18, 11-19, 11-20, 11-21, 11-22, 11-23, 11-24, 11-25, 11-26, 11-27, 11-28, 11-29, 11-30, 12-13, 12-14, 12-15, 12-16, 12-17, 12-18, 12-19, 12-20, 12-21, 12-22, 12-23, 12-24, 12-25, 12-26, 12-27, 12-28, 12-29, 12-30, 13-14, 13-15, 13-16, 13-17, 13-18, 13-19, 13-20, 13-21, 13-22, 13-23, 13-24, 13-25, 13-26, 13-27, 13-28, 13-29, 13-30, 14-15, 14-16, 14-17, 14-18, 14-19, 14-20, 14-21, 14-22, 14-23, 14-24, 14-25, 14-26, 14-27, 14-28, 14-29, 14-30, 15-16, 15-17, 15-18, 15-19, 15-20, 15-21, 15-22, 15-23, 15-24, 15-25, 15-26, 15-27, 15-28, 15-29, 15-30, 16-17, 16-18, 16-19, 16-20, 16-21, 16-22, 16-23, 16-24, 16-25, 16-26, 16-27, 16-28, 16-29, 16-30, 17-18, 17-19, 17-20, 17-21, 17-22, 17-23, 17-24, 17-25, 17-26, 17-27, 17-28, 17-29, 17-30, 18-19, 18-20, 18-21, 18-22, 18-23, 18-24, 18-25, 18-26, 18-27, 18-28, 18-29, 18-30, 19-20, 19-21, 19-22, 19-23, 19-24, 19-25, 19-26, 19-27, 19-28, 19-29, 19-30, 20-21, 20-22, 20-23, 20-24, 20-25, 20-26, 20-27, 20-28, 20-29, 20-30, 21-22, 21-23, 21-24, 21-25, 21-26, 21-27, 21-28, 21-29, 21-30, 22-23, 22-24, 22-25, 22-26, 22-27, 22-28, 22-29, 22-30, 23-24, 23-25, 23-26, 23-27, 23-28, 23-29, 23-30, 24-25, 24-26, 24-27, 24-28, 24-29, 24-30, 25-26, 25-27, 25-28, 25-29, 25-30, 26-27, 26-28, 26-29, 26-30, 27-28, 27-29, 27-30, 28-29, 28-30, or 29-30 linked monomer subunits.
  • In certain embodiments, the ranges for the oligomeric compounds listed herein are meant to limit the number of monomer subunits in the oligomeric compounds, however such oligomeric compounds may further include 5′ and/or 3′-terminal groups including but not limited to protecting groups such as hydroxyl protecting groups, optionally linked conjugate groups and/or other substituent groups.
  • In certain embodiments, the preparation of oligomeric compounds as disclosed herein is performed according to literature procedures for DNA: Protocols for Oligonucleotides and Analogs, Agrawal, Ed., Humana Press, 1993, and/or RNA: Scaringe, Methods, 2001, 23, 206-217; Gait et al., Applications of Chemically synthesized RNA in RNA:Protein Interactions, Smith, Ed., 1998, 1-36; Gallo et al., Tetrahedron, 2001, 57, 5707-5713. Additional methods for solid-phase synthesis may be found in Caruthers U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,415,732; 4,458,066; 4,500,707; 4,668,777; 4,973,679; and 5,132,418; and Koster U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,725,677 and Re. 34,069.
  • Oligomeric compounds are routinely prepared using solid support methods as opposed to solution phase methods. Commercially available equipment commonly used for the preparation of oligomeric compounds that utilize the solid support method is sold by several vendors including, for example, Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.). Any other means for such synthesis known in the art may additionally or alternatively be employed. Suitable solid phase techniques, including automated synthesis techniques, are described in Oligonucleotides and Analogues, a Practical Approach, F. Eckstein, Ed., Oxford University Press, New York, 1991.
  • The synthesis of RNA and related analogs relative to the synthesis of DNA and related analogs has been increasing as efforts in RNA interference and micro RNA increase. The primary RNA synthesis strategies that are presently being used commercially include 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-[1(2-fluorophenyl)-4-methoxypiperidin-4-yl] (FPMP), 2′-O-[(triisopropylsilyl)oxy]methyl (2′-O—CH2—O-Si(iPr)3 (TOM) and the 5′-O-silyl ether-2′-ACE (5′-O-bis(trimethylsiloxy)cyclododecyloxysilyl ether (DOD)-2′-O-bis(2-acetoxyethoxy)methyl (ACE). A current list of some of the major companies currently offering RNA products include Pierce Nucleic Acid Technologies, Dharmacon Research Inc., Ameri Biotechnologies Inc., and Integrated DNA Technologies, Inc. One company, Princeton Separations, is marketing an RNA synthesis activator advertised to reduce coupling times especially with TOM and TBDMS chemistries. The primary groups being used for commercial RNA synthesis are: TBDMS: 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-t-butyldimethylsilyl; TOM: 2′-O-[(triisopropylsilyl)oxy]methyl; DOD/ACE: (5′-O-bis(trimethylsiloxy)cyclododecyloxysilyl ether-2′-O-bis(2-acetoxyethoxy)methyl; and FPMP: 5′-O-DMT-2′-O-[1(2-fluorophenyl)-4-ethoxypiperidin-4-yl]. In certain embodiments, each of the aforementioned RNA synthesis strategies can be used herein. In certain embodiments, the aforementioned RNA synthesis strategies can be performed together in a hybrid fashion e.g. using a 5′-protecting group from one strategy with a 2′-O-protecting from another strategy.
  • As used herein the term “hybridization” includes the pairing of complementary strands of oligomeric compounds such as including the binding of an oligomeric compound as provided herein to a target nucleic acid. In certain embodiments, the mechanism of pairing involves hydrogen bonding, which may be Watson-Crick, Hoogsteen or reversed Hoogsteen hydrogen bonding, between complementary heterocyclic base moieties of nucleosides (or monomer subunits) that are in close enough proximity to hydrogen bond. For example, adenine and thymine are complementary nucleobases which pair through the formation of hydrogen bonds. Hybridization can occur under varying circumstances.
  • An oligomeric compound is specifically hybridizable when binding of the compound to the target nucleic acid interferes with the normal function of the target nucleic acid resulting in a loss of activity. To be specifically hybridizable also requires a sufficient degree of complementarity to avoid non-specific binding of the oligomeric compound to non-target nucleic acid sequences under the conditions in which specific binding is desired, i.e., under physiological conditions (for in vivo assays or therapeutic treatment) or other diagnostic conditions (for performing in vitro assays).
  • As used herein the term “complementary,” refers to the capacity for precise pairing of two nucleobases regardless of where the two nucleobases are located. For example, if a nucleobase at a certain position of an oligomeric compound is capable of hydrogen bonding with a nucleobase at a certain position of a target nucleic acid, the target nucleic acid being a DNA, RNA, or oligonucleotide molecule, then the position of hydrogen bonding between the oligonucleotide and the target nucleic acid is considered to be a complementary position. The oligomeric compound and the further DNA, RNA, or oligonucleotide molecule are complementary to each other when a sufficient number of complementary positions in each molecule are occupied by nucleobases which can hydrogen bond with each other. Thus, “specifically hybridizable” and “complementary” are terms which are used to indicate a sufficient degree of precise pairing or complementarity over a sufficient number of nucleobases such that stable and specific binding occurs between an oligomeric compound and its target nucleic acid.
  • It is understood in the art that the sequence of an oligomeric compound need not be 100% complementary to that of its target nucleic acid to be specifically hybridizable. Moreover, an oligomeric compound may hybridize over one or more segments such that intervening or adjacent segments are not involved in the hybridization event (e.g., a loop structure or hairpin structure). In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds can comprise at least about 70%, at least about 80%, at least about 90%, at least about 95%, or at least about 99% sequence complementarity to a target region within the target nucleic acid sequence to which they are targeted. For example, an oligomeric compound in which 18 of 20 nucleobases of the oligomeric compound are complementary to a target region, and would therefore specifically hybridize, would represent 90 percent complementarity. In this example, the remaining noncomplementary nucleobases may be clustered or interspersed with complementary nucleobases and need not be contiguous to each other or to complementary nucleobases. As such, an oligomeric compound which is 18 nucleobases in length having 4 (four) noncomplementary nucleobases which are flanked by two regions of complete complementarity with the target nucleic acid would have 77.8% overall complementarity with the target nucleic acid and would thus fall within this scope. Percent complementarity of an oligomeric compound with a region of a target nucleic acid can be determined routinely using BLAST programs (basic local alignment search tools) and PowerBLAST programs known in the art (Altschul et al., J. Mol. Biol., 1990, 215, 403-410; Zhang and Madden, Genome Res., 1997, 7, 649-656).
  • Further included herein are oligomeric compounds such as antisense oligomeric compounds, antisense oligonucleotides, ribozymes, external guide sequence (EGS) oligonucleotides, alternate splicers, primers, probes, and other oligomeric compounds which hybridize to at least a portion of the target nucleic acid. As such, these oligomeric compounds may be introduced in the form of single-stranded, double-stranded, circular or hairpin oligomeric compounds and may contain structural elements such as internal or terminal bulges or loops. Once introduced to a system, the oligomeric compounds provided herein may elicit the action of one or more enzymes or structural proteins to effect modification of the target nucleic acid. Alternatively, the oligomeric compound may inhibit the activity the target nucleic acid through an occupancy-based method, thus interfering with the activity of the target nucleic acid.
  • One non-limiting example of such an enzyme is RNAse H, a cellular endonuclease which cleaves the RNA strand of an RNA:DNA duplex. It is known in the art that single-stranded oligomeric compounds which are “DNA-like” elicit RNAse H. Activation of RNase H, therefore, results in cleavage of the RNA target, thereby greatly enhancing the efficiency of oligonucleotide-mediated inhibition of gene expression. Similar roles have been postulated for other ribonucleases such as those in the RNase III and ribonuclease L family of enzymes.
  • While one form of oligomeric compound is a single-stranded antisense oligonucleotide, in many species the introduction of double-stranded structures, such as double-stranded RNA (dsRNA) molecules, has been shown to induce potent and specific antisense-mediated reduction of the function of a gene or its associated gene products. This phenomenon occurs in both plants and animals and is believed to have an evolutionary connection to viral defense and transposon silencing.
  • In some embodiments, “suitable target segments” may be employed in a screen for additional oligomeric compounds that modulate the expression of a selected protein. “Modulators” are those oligomeric compounds that decrease or increase the expression of a nucleic acid molecule encoding a protein and which comprise at least an 8-nucleobase portion which is complementary to a suitable target segment. The screening method comprises the steps of contacting a suitable target segment of a nucleic acid molecule encoding a protein with one or more candidate modulators, and selecting for one or more candidate modulators which decrease or increase the expression of a nucleic acid molecule encoding a protein. Once it is shown that the candidate modulator or modulators are capable of modulating (e.g. either decreasing or increasing) the expression of a nucleic acid molecule encoding a peptide, the modulator may then be employed herein in further investigative studies of the function of the peptide, or for use as a research, diagnostic, or therapeutic agent. In the case of oligomeric compounds targeted to microRNA, candidate modulators may be evaluated by the extent to which they increase the expression of a microRNA target RNA or protein (as interference with the activity of a microRNA will result in the increased expression of one or more targets of the microRNA).
  • Suitable target segments may also be combined with their respective complementary oligomeric compounds provided herein to form stabilized double-stranded (duplexed) oligonucleotides. Such double stranded oligonucleotide moieties have been shown in the art to modulate target expression and regulate translation as well as RNA processing via an antisense mechanism. Moreover, the double-stranded moieties may be subject to chemical modifications (Fire et al., Nature, 1998, 391, 806-811; Timmons and Fire, Nature, 1998, 395, 854; Timmons et al., Gene, 2001, 263, 103-112; Tabara et al., Science, 1998, 282, 430-431; Montgomery et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1998, 95, 15502-15507; Tuschl et al., Genes Dev., 1999, 13, 3191-3197; Elbashir et al., Nature, 2001, 411, 494-498; Elbashir et al., Genes Dev., 2001, 15, 188-200). For example, such double-stranded moieties have been shown to inhibit the target by the classical hybridization of antisense strand of the duplex to the target, thereby triggering enzymatic degradation of the target (Tijsterman et al., Science, 2002, 295, 694-697).
  • The oligomeric compounds provided herein can also be applied in the areas of drug discovery and target validation. In certain embodiments, provided herein is the use of the oligomeric compounds and targets identified herein in drug discovery efforts to elucidate relationships that exist between proteins and a disease state, phenotype, or condition. These methods include detecting or modulating a target peptide comprising contacting a sample, tissue, cell, or organism with one or more oligomeric compounds provided herein, measuring the nucleic acid or protein level of the target and/or a related phenotypic or chemical endpoint at some time after treatment, and optionally comparing the measured value to a non-treated sample or sample treated with a further oligomeric compound as provided herein. These methods can also be performed in parallel or in combination with other experiments to determine the function of unknown genes for the process of target validation or to determine the validity of a particular gene product as a target for treatment or prevention of a particular disease, condition, or phenotype. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds are provided for use in therapy. In certain embodiments, the therapy is reducing target messenger RNA.
  • As used herein, the term “dose” refers to a specified quantity of a pharmaceutical agent provided in a single administration. In certain embodiments, a dose may be administered in two or more boluses, tablets, or injections. For example, in certain embodiments, where subcutaneous administration is desired, the desired dose requires a volume not easily accommodated by a single injection. In such embodiments, two or more injections may be used to achieve the desired dose. In certain embodiments, a dose may be administered in two or more injections to minimize injection site reaction in an individual.
  • In certain embodiments, chemically-modified oligomeric compounds are provided herein that may have a higher affinity for target RNAs than does non-modified DNA. In certain such embodiments, higher affinity in turn provides increased potency allowing for the administration of lower doses of such compounds, reduced potential for toxicity, improvement in therapeutic index and decreased overall cost of therapy.
  • Effect of nucleoside modifications on RNAi activity is evaluated according to existing literature (Elbashir et al., Nature, 2001, 411, 494-498; Nishikura et al., Cell, 2001, 107, 415-416; and Bass et al., Cell, 2000, 101, 235-238.)
  • In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein can be utilized for diagnostics, therapeutics, prophylaxis and as research reagents and kits. Furthermore, antisense oligonucleotides, which are able to inhibit gene expression with exquisite specificity, are often used by those of ordinary skill to elucidate the function of particular genes or to distinguish between functions of various members of a biological pathway. In certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein can be utilized either alone or in combination with other oligomeric compounds or other therapeutics as tools in differential and/or combinatorial analyses to elucidate expression patterns of a portion or the entire complement of genes expressed within cells and tissues. Oligomeric compounds can also be effectively used as primers and probes under conditions favoring gene amplification or detection, respectively. These primers and probes are useful in methods requiring the specific detection of nucleic acid molecules encoding proteins and in the amplification of the nucleic acid molecules for detection or for use in further studies. Hybridization of oligomeric compounds as provided herein, particularly the primers and probes, with a nucleic acid can be detected by means known in the art. Such means may include conjugation of an enzyme to the oligonucleotide, radiolabelling of the oligonucleotide or any other suitable detection means. Kits using such detection means for detecting the level of selected proteins in a sample may also be prepared.
  • As one nonlimiting example, expression patterns within cells or tissues treated with one or more of the oligomeric compounds provided herein are compared to control cells or tissues not treated with oligomeric compounds and the patterns produced are analyzed for differential levels of gene expression as they pertain, for example, to disease association, signaling pathway, cellular localization, expression level, size, structure or function of the genes examined. These analyses can be performed on stimulated or unstimulated cells and in the presence or absence of other compounds and or oligomeric compounds which affect expression patterns.
  • Examples of methods of gene expression analysis known in the art include DNA arrays or microarrays (Brazma and Vilo, FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 17-24; Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16), SAGE (serial analysis of gene expression)(Madden, et al., Drug Discov. Today, 2000, 5, 415-425), READS (restriction enzyme amplification of digested cDNAs) (Prashar and Weissman, Methods Enzymol., 1999, 303, 258-72), TOGA (total gene expression analysis) (Sutcliffe, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 2000, 97, 1976-81), protein arrays and proteomics (Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16; Jungblut, et al., Electrophoresis, 1999, 20, 2100-10), expressed sequence tag (EST) sequencing (Celis, et al., FEBS Lett., 2000, 480, 2-16; Larsson, et al., J. Biotechnol., 2000, 80, 143-57), subtractive RNA fingerprinting (SuRF) (Fuchs, et al., Anal. Biochem., 2000, 286, 91-98; Larson, et al., Cytometry, 2000, 41, 203-208), subtractive cloning, differential display (DD) (Jurecic and Belmont, Curr. Opin. Microbiol., 2000, 3, 316-21), comparative genomic hybridization (Carulli, et al., J. Cell Biochem. Suppl., 1998, 31, 286-96), FISH (fluorescent in situ hybridization) techniques (Going and Gusterson, Eur. J. Cancer, 1999, 35, 1895-904) and mass spectrometry methods (To, Comb. Chem. High Throughput Screen, 2000, 3, 235-41).
  • While in certain embodiments, oligomeric compounds provided herein can be utilized as described, the following examples serve only to illustrate and are not intended to be limiting.
  • EXAMPLES General
  • 1H and 13C NMR spectra were recorded on a 300 MHz and 75 MHz Bruker spectrometer, respectively. Silica gel 60 from EM Science was used for purification.
  • Example 1 Preparation of (1R,3R,4R,7S)-7-(2-cyanoethoxy(diisopropylamino)phosphin oxy)-1-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityloxymethyl)-3-(N-Bz-(Cytidin-1-yl)-2,5-dioxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octane (14 U, 16 C)
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00025
    Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00026
  • Note: Compound 4 was prepared from compound 1 by a slightly modified version of the procedures found in Tetrahedron Lett., 1993, 1653 and Tetrahedron, 2004, 6813.
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00027
  • Compound 1
  • The starting material, Compound 1, is prepared according to the procedure of Moffatt et al, J. Org. Chem., 1979, 44, 1301. Compound 1 is also commercially available from a number of vendors.
  • Compound 2 Alkylation of Diacetone Glucose
  • NaH (60% in Mineral oil, 49.2 g, 1.6 equivalents) was added to a 2 L round bottom flask flushed with nitrogen, and the NaH was washed with hexanes (2×1.0 L) to remove the mineral oil. After decanting the hexanes, DMF (700 mL) was added and the mixture was cooled in an ice bath. Diacetone glucose (1, 200 g, 0.77 moles) was then added over a period of 30 minutes. The ice-bath was removed and the mixture was stirred for 1 hour at room temperature. The reaction was then cooled in an ice-bath for second time, and 1-bromomethylnapthylene (187 g, 1.1 equiv) in DMF (100 mL) was added drop-wise over a 30-minute period. Upon complete addition, the ice-bath was stirred over night while the ice was allowed to melt, thereby allowing the reaction to proceed to room temperature. After 16 hours, the reaction was complete, as determined by tlc (Rf=0.45, 20% EtOAc/hexanes and visualized by charring after treatment with anisaldehyde spray reagent). The mixture was then poured onto cold water (1.5 L) that was placed in an ice bath. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (250 mL×2) and then washed successively with saturated NaHCO3 (1 L), brine (1 L) and the organic layer was evaporated under reduced pressure to give a dark brown oil. This oil was dissolved in minimal DCM and passed through a plug of silica gel eluting with 100% Hexanes (3.0 L) to remove minor upper impurities, then 20% EtOAc/Hexanes to collect the major spot. Concentration of the solvent provided the alkylated product (269 g, 87%) as a brown oil which was used without further purification.
  • Selective Cleavage of the Isopropylidine
  • The crude oil (269 g, 0.67 moles), was dissolved in acetic acid (2.2 L) and water (900 mL). The reaction was allowed to proceed for 16 hours at room temperature. The reaction was follow by tlc (20% EtOAc/Hexanes). After completion of the reaction, most of the acetic acid was evaporated under reduced pressure and then the remaining solution was poured into a stirred mixture of EtOAc (1 L)/NaHCO3 (1 L, aq. sat.) in small portions followed by NaHCO3 (s) until gas evolution ceased. The organic layer was washed with water (1 L×2), brine (1 L), dried Na2SO4, filtered and removed under reduced pressure to give a crude yellow oil. The oil was then dissolved in minimal DCM and passed through a plug of silica gel eluting with 20% EtOAc/Hexanes (3.0 L) to remove the upper spot impurities, and then eluted with 80% EtOAc/Hexanes to give the major compound. Evaporation of the solvent gave the crude product (201 g, 82%) as a light yellow oil. (Rf=0.22, 20% EtOAc/hexanes).
  • Selective Silylation of the Primary Hydroxy group
  • The crude compound (105 g, 0.293 moles), was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (1 L) followed by the addition of imidazole (39.9 g, 0.58 moles). The resulting yellow solution was cooled to 0° C. in ice-bath while stirring under nitrogen. tert-Butyldimethylsilyl chloride (TBDMSCl, 48.5 ml, 0.322 moles) dissolved in a minimal amount of DMF was added drop-wise over a 40-minute period. The ice-bath, initially at 0° C. upon complete addition, was allowed to come to room temperature and stirring continued for an additional 16 hours. The reaction was complete at this time, as determined by tlc (Rf=0.56, 20% EtOAc/hexanes). The reaction was then quenched by addition of MeOH (50 mL). Water (1 L) and EtOAc (500 mL) were then added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 (1 L) and brine (1 L) and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give compound 2 (139.0 g), as a yellow oil. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3+2% D2O): δ 7.7 and 7.4 (m, 7H, Nap), 5.86 (d, 1H, J=3.6 Hz), 4.7 (m, 2H), 4.54 (d, 1H, J=5.7 Hz), 4.08 (s, 2H), 3.9-4.0 (m, 1H), 3.7-3.8 (m, 2H), 1.39 (s, 1H, CH3), 1.24 (s, 1H, CH3), 0.82 (s, 9H, tBu), 0.02 (s, 6H, SiMe2). 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3+2% D2O): δ 135.1, 133.3, 133.1, 128.3, 128.0, 127.7, 126.6, 126.2, 126.0, 125.7, 111.7, 105.2, 82.6, 81.9, 79.6, 72.6, 68.6, 64.5, 26.7, 26.3, 25.9, 18.3, −5.4. LCMS (Method CN1), retention time=1.8 min, m/z=497.1 (M+Na), >98% purity.
  • Compound 3
  • Oxalyl chloride (12.2 mL, 145 mmoles) and CH2Cl2 (280 mL) were added to a 2 L round bottom flask fitted with two addition funnels. One addition funnel contained DMSO (20.5 mL, 289 mmoles) in CH2Cl2 (30 mL), while the other funnel contained compound 2 (45.75 g, 96.4 mmoles) dissolved in CH2Cl2 (380 mL). The round bottom was then cooled to −78° C. under nitrogen, and the DMSO solution was added dropwise over 15 minutes. After stirring an additional 50 minutes, the solution of compound 2 was added dropwise over 15 min. After stirring an additional 30 minutes, Et3N (60 mL, 434 mmoles) was added over 10 minutes and the reaction was allowed to proceed at room temperature for 30 minutes. The reaction was then quenched with NH4Cl (sat, 150 mL), and the organic layer was washed successively with 10% citric acid (1 L), sodium bicarbonate (sat, 1 L), and brine (1 L). The organic layer was then dried over Na2SO4, concentrated and filtered thru silica gel (20% EtOAc/hexanes) to give 42.4 g (93%) of the crude ketone, which was used directly in the next step without further purification. tlc, (Rf=0.55, 20% EtOAc/hexanes); LCMS (Method CN1), retention time=2.1 min, m/z=473.1 (M+H), 495.1 (M+Na), 967.3 (2M+Na). The crude ketone (39 g, 82.5 mmoles) in THF (240 mL) was added to a 1 L round bottom flask equipped with an addition funnel containing 1.0 M vinyl magnesiumbromide in THF (125 mL). The flask was cooled in an ice bath and the Grignard reagent was then added dropwise over 10 minutes. The reaction was then allowed to proceed at room temperature for 1.5 h, and quenched with NH4Cl (sat, 150 mL). Et2O (400 mL) was added and the organic layer was washed with brine (1 L). The organic layer was then passed through a plug of silica gel (eluting with Et2O as necessary) and then concentrated to give a quantitative yield of compound 3, which was about 90% pure, and used directly in the next step. Rf=0.55, 20% EtOAc/hexanes; 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 7.79-7.90 and 7.47-7.56 (m, 7H, Nap), 6.11 (dd, 1H, J=16.2, 9.6 Hz, ═CH—), 6.08 (d, 1H, J=3.9 Hz, H-1), 5.49 (dd, 1H, J=17.4, 1.5 Hz, ═CH2); 5.22 (dd, 1H, J=12.3, 1.5 Hz, ═CH2), 4.91 and 4.72 (ABq, 2H, CH2), 4.71 (d, 1H, J=4.2 Hz, H-2), 4.38 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz, H-4), 4.24 (d, 1H, J=2.7 Hz, H-3), 3.92 (s, 1H, OH), 3.63 (d, 1H, J=9.6 Hz, 6a), 3.47 (d, 1H, J=9.6 Hz, 6b), 1.53 (s, 3H, CH3), 1.38 (s, 3H, CH3), 0.86 (s, 9H, C(CH3)3), −0.0 (s, 3H, SiMe), −0.08 (s, 3H, SiMe). 1H NMR matched closely with the OBn derivative from Tetrahedron Lett., 1993, 1653. LCMS (Method DR1), m/z=501.1 (M+H), 523.2 (M+Na).
  • Compound 4 Hydrolysis of TBS and Isopropylidine
  • To the mostly pure compound 3 (41.3 g, 82.5 mmoles) and Amberlite (IR-120 H+ Strongly Acidic ion-exchange resin, 80 g), was added 1,4-dioxane (275 mL) and H2O (230 mL). This was heated at 90° C. for 36 hours, and then filtered hot through celite and evaporated to dryness. The resultant crude solid was then dried for 12 hours at 50° C. over P2O5.
  • Acetylation of the Hydrolyzed Material
  • The crude white solid was treated with pyridine (290 mL) and Ac2O (78 mL, 10 equiv) was then added dropwise followed by DMAP (120 mg). The reaction proceeded at room temperature for 16 hours and then the solvent was evaporated and coevaporated with toluene (3×100 mL). The major product was purified by silica gel chromatography (25% EtOAc/hexanes to 35% EtOAc/hexanes) to give the crude tetraacetate, compound 4 (31.4 g, 74%) as a clear white foam. TLC (Rf=0.27, 40% EtOAc/hexanes). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3): δ 7.83-7.79, 7.68, 7.5-7.4, 7.35 and 7.32 (m, 7H, Nap), 5.95-5.87 (m, 3H, CH═CH and H1), 5.63 (dd, 1H, J=8.7, 3.3 Hz, ═CH), 5.46 (d, 1H, J=9.9 Hz, H4), 5.25 (dd, 1H, J=9.3, 8.4 Hz, H2), 4.76 (s, 2H, CH2Nap), 4.14 and 3.71 (d, J=12.4 Hz, H6), 3.79 (dd, 1H, J=9.8, 9.8 Hz, H3), 2.10 (s, 6H, Ac×2), 1.95 (s, 3H, Ac), 1.90 (s, 3H, Ac). 13C NMR (75 MHz, CDCl3+2% D2O): δ 170.7, 169.5, 169.1, 169.0, 135.2, 133.2, 133.0, 129.8, 128.3, 127.9, 127.7, 126.3 (2C), 126.1, 125.5, 122.03, 88.9, 78.5, 78.1, 74.6, 72.6, 69.5, 65.2, 20.9 (3C), 20.8. LCMS (Method CN1), retention time=1.47 min, m/z=537.1 (M+Na), purity=99%.
  • Compound 5 Vorbruggen Coupling and Deacetylation
  • N,O-Bis(trimethylsilyl)acetamide (BSA, 54.7 mL, 224 mmol) was added to a stirred suspension of uracil (10.2 g, 90.7 mmol) and compound 4 (31.1 g, 60.4 mmoles) in dry acetonitrile (300 mL). After stirring at rt for 30 min a clear solution was observed, and the reaction was cooled to 0° C. under nitrogen. Trimethylsilyfluoromethanesulfonate (TMSOTf, 21.9 mL, 121 mmol) was added and after the reaction was stirred at rt for 15 min, it was transferred to a preheated oil bath at 80° C. After stirring for 4 h at 80° C., the reaction was cooled to rt and MeOH (20 mL), EtOAc (250 mL) and H2O (400 mL) were added. The organic phase was then sequentially washed with sat. NaHCO3, brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated to provide the crude triacetate. TLC (Rf=0.60, 80% EtOAc/hexanes). LCMS (Method DRHI), m/z=567.1 (M+H). The crude nucleoside was treated with 7N MeOH/NH3 (300 mL) at 50° C. overnight and then evaporated to dryness. The major product was purified by silica gel chromatography (2% MeOH/CH2Cl2 to 6% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give the triol compound 5 (17.75 g, 67%) as a white solid. TLC (Rf=0.25, 8% MeOH/CH2Cl2). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6/2% D2O): δ 7.9-7.8 (m, 5H, Nap and H6), 7.62, 7.59, and 7.53-7.46 (m, 3H, Nap), 6.07 (dd, 1H, J=11.9, 17.3 Hz, C═CH), 5.68 (d, 1H, J=3.0 Hz, H5), 5.66 (s, 1H, H1′), 5.45-5.39 (m, 2H, C═CH2), 4.99 (s, 2H, CH2ONap), 3.93 (d, 1H, J=9.6 Hz, H4′), 3.67 (dd, 1H, J=8.9, 8.9 Hz, H2′), 3.43 (dd, 1H, J=9.6, 12.0 Hz, H3′), 3.16 and 3.42 (d, 2H, J=8.9 Hz, 6′-CH2). 13C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-d6/2% D2O): δ 162.8 (C4), 150.6 (C2), 141.4 (C6), 136.8 (quat), 132.6 (quat), 132.5 (═CH—), 132.0 (quat), 127.3, 127.2, 127.1, 125.8, 125.7, 125.3,* 117.9 (═CH2), 101.6 (C5), 82.3 (C3′), 81.3 (C5′), 77.8 (C1′), 73.5 (CH2ONap), 71.1 (C2′), 68.4 (C4′), 64.8 (6′-CH2). *Between 127.3 and 125.3 lies one additional carbon that overlaps one of the others. LCMS (Method G1), retention time=2.09 min, m/z=463.1 (M+Na), purity >99%.
  • Compound 6 Benzylidine Formation
  • To a stirred mixture of triol compound 5 (16.1 g, 36.5 mmoles) in dry DMF (180 mL) was added camphorsulphonic acid (CSA, 850 mg) followed by benzaldehyde dimethylacetal (BDMA, 22 mL, 146 mmoles). This was stirred at 50° C., and after two hours additional CSA (600 mg) and BDMA (6 mL) were added. After an additional 2 h, the reaction mixture was cooled to rt and partitioned between EtOAc (300 mL) and a NaHCO3 (sat)/H2O (500 mL, 3:2). The organic layer was then washed with brine twice, and the aqueous layers were back-extracted with additional portions of EtOAc. The combined organic layers were dried over Na2SO4, and evaporated to give the crude benzylidine. The crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography (2% MeOH/CH2Cl2 to 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give the benzylidine compound 6 (18.6 g, 96%) as a white solid. The final compound contained some DMF as determined by 1H NMR and did not interfere the subsequent step. TLC (Rf=0.45, 8% MeOH/CH2Cl2). 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6/2% D2O): δ 7.9-7.8 (m, 5H, Nap and H6), 7.71-7.78 and 7.51-7.41 (m, 8H, Nap, Ph), 6.32 (dd, 3H, J=11.1, 18.2 Hz, C═CH), 5.84 (d, 1H, J=9.3 Hz, H1′), 5.77 (s, 1H, benzylidine CH), 5.72 (d, 1H, J=7.8 Hz, H5), 5.61-5.56 (m, 2H, C═CH2), 4.96 (s, 2H, CH2ONap), 4.06 (d, 1H, J=10.5 Hz, H4′), 4.0-3.7 (m, 4H, H2′, H3′, and 6′-CH2). 13C NMR (75 MHz, DMSO-d6/2% D2O): δ 162.8 (C4), 150.4 (C2), 140.8 (C6), 136.9 (quat), 136.0 (quat), 134.5 (═CH—), 132.2 (quat), 131.9 (quat), 128.5, 127.7, 127.1, 127.0, 125.7, 125.5, 125.3, 125.2, 125.1*, 118.0 (═CH2), 101.8 (benzylidine CH), 101.2 (C5), 80.8 (CH), 78.6 (C1′), 77.9 (CH), 75.5 (6′-CH2), 72.9 (CH2ONap), 71.5 (CH), 70.6 (quat). *Between 128.5 and 125.1 lies one additional carbon that overlaps one of the others. LCMS (Method G1), retention time=3.70 min, m/z=529.1 (M+H), 551.1 (M+Na), purity >99%.
  • Compound 7 Dihydroxylation, Periodate Cleavage and Reduction to the Alcohol
  • To as stirred solution of compound 6 (45 g, 85 mmoles) in 95% acetone (aq, 350 mL) was added N-methylmorpholine oxide (48 g, 409 mmoles) and 2.5% OsO4 in isopropanol (70 mg OsO4), and the reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 4 days. At that time, the reaction was filtered thru celite and silica gel, and eluted thouroughly with acetone. The resultant crude product was purified by column chromatography (2.5% to 5% methanol/DCM) to give 19.74 g of the diol, which was immediately treated with THF (175 mL), H2O (175 mL) and NaIO4 (15 g, 70 mmoles). After 1 hour, water and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude aldehyde. This compound was immediately treated with 4 equivalents of NaBH4 in methanol at 0° C. for 1 hour, and then water and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, 10% citric acid (aq) and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude alcohol. The reaction was purified by silica gel chromatography, eluting with methanol/DCM to give compound 7 (40% overall yield). 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 8 Anhydro Formation
  • To a stirred 0° C. mixture of compound 7 (1.28 g, 2.4 mmoles) and triphenyl phosphine (2.2 g, 8.4 mmoles) in dry THF (20 mL) was added DIAD (1.6 mL, 8.4 mmoles) dropwise. After stirring at room temp for 18 hours, water and DCM were added and the organic was washed with brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude bicyclic product. This was purified by silica gel chromatography (2% methanol/DCM to 10% methanol/DCM) to give the pure compound 8 (1.11 g, 90%). 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 9 and 10 Ring Closure to the Bicyclo[2.2.2]Octane Ring System
  • Compound 8 (1.1 g, 2.15 mmoles) was dissolved in DMF (15 mL) and treated with NaH (60% in mineral oil, 6.4 mmoles) for 15 minutes. At that time, NH4Cl and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, water and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude compound. This was purified by silica gel chromatography (3% methanol/DCM) to give the pure compound 9 (866 mg, 79%) and 10 (68 mg), individually. 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 11 Removal of Nap
  • Compound 9 (800 mg, 1.6 mmoles) was dissolved in DCM (15 mL) and treated with water (1.5 mL) and DDQ (529 mg, 2.3 mmoles). After stirring for 16 hours, water and DCM were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude alcohol. The organics were back-extracted several times with DCM. The crude compound was co-evaporated with methanol/DCM (10 mL) and silica gel (1 g). After drying, this was applied directly to a silica gel column, and purified by silica gel chromatography (2% to 6% methanol/DCM) to give compound 11 (409 mg, 70%). 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 12 The Barton-Macombie Deoxygenation
  • A stirred mixture of compound 11 (388 mg, 1.04 mmoles) and DMAP (343 mg, 2.8 mmoles) in CH3CN (14 mL) at 0° C. was added phenylchlorothioformate (196 μL, 1.45 mmoles). After stirring for 4 hours, the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. Toluene (13 mL), Bu4SnH (1.65 mL, 6.24 mmoles) and AIBN (15 mg) were heated at 90° C. for 4 hours. The reaction was then evaporated to dryness, and purified by silica gel chromatography (1.5% to 3% methanol/DCM) to give compound 12 (254 mg, 68%). 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 13 Removal of the Benzylidine and DMT Protection
  • A stirred mixture of compound 12 (230 mg, 0.64 mmoles) was hydrogenated over 10% Pd/C (20 mg) at 40 psi for 10 hours. The reaction was filtered and evaporated and co-evaporated with toluene. After drying under reduced pressure for 16 hours, pyridine (3 mL) and DMTCl (187 mg, 0.55 mmoles) was added. The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 4 hours, and water and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. The resultant foam was purified by silica gel chromatography (10% to 40% acetone/CH2Cl2) to give compound 13 (171 mg, 47%). 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 14 Preparation of U-Amidite
  • 2-Cyanoethyl N,N′-tetraisopropylphosphoramidite (0.75 μL, 0.24 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 13 (90 mg, 0.157 mmol), tetrazole (8 mg), N-methylimidazole (3 μL) in DMF (1 mL). After stirring for 8 hours at room temperature, the reaction was poured into EtOAc and the organic phase was washed with 90% brine, brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under vacuum. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 60% to 90% EtOAc/hexanes) gave Compound 14 (99 mg, 92%) as a white solid. 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 15 Conversion of U to CBz
  • A solution of compound 13 (114 mg, 0.20 mmoles), in CH3CN (2 mL) was treated with Et3N (1.1 mL, 7.96 mmoles) and cooled to 0° C. TMSCl (76 μL, 0.6 mmoles) was added and after 1 hour, 1,2,4-triazole (330 mg, 4.8 mmoles) was added followed by POCl3 (146 μL, 1.6 mmoles). The reaction was then allowed to proceed for 4 hours at room temperature. Water and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude triazole. A prestirred mixture of NaH (48 mg, 1.2 μmoles) and benzamide (145 mg, 1.2 μmoles) was then added. After 1 hour, water and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. Triethylamine trihydroflouride (166 μL, 1.0 mmol) was added to a solution of the crude compound and triethylamine (0.06 mL, 0.4 mmol) in THF (1 mL). After stirring at room temperature for 12 hours, the reaction was poured into EtOAc and the organic layer was washed with H2O, saturated NaHCO3, brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 20% to 40% acetone in chloroform) gave Compound 15 (73 mg, 54% overall).
  • Compound 16 Preparation of CBz Amidite
  • 2-Cyanoethyl N,N′-tetraisopropylphosphoramidite (0.50 mL, 0.156 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 15 (70 mg, 1.0 μmol), tetrazole (7 mg), N-methylimidazole (3 μL) in DMF (1 mL). After stirring for 8 hours at room temperature, the reaction was poured into EtOAc and the organic phase was washed with 90% brine, brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under vacuum. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 60% to 90% EtOAc/hexanes) gave Compound 16 (62 mg, 68%) as a white solid. 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure.
  • Example 2 Preparation of (1S,3R,4S,7R)-7-(2-cyanoethoxy(diisopropylamino)phosphin oxy)-1-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityloxymethyl)-3-(heterocyclic base radical)-2,5-dioxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octane (27) Route 1:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00028
    Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00029
  • Route 2: Alternative Procedures to Prepare Compound 20
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00030
  • Compound 6 is prepared as per the procedures illustrated in Example 1.
  • Example 3 Preparation of (1R,3R,4R,8R)-8-(2-cyanoethoxy(diisopropylamino)phosphin oxy)-1-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityloxymethyl)-3-(heterocyclic base radical)-2,5-dioxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octane (39)
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00031
    Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00032
  • Compound 6 is prepared as per the procedures illustrated in Example 1.
  • Example 4 Preparation of (1S,3R,4S,8S)-8-(2-cyanoethoxy(diisopropylamino)phosphin oxy)-1-(4,4′-dimethoxytrityloxymethyl)-3-(heterocyclic base radical)-2,5-dioxa-bicyclo[2.2.2]octane (47 U, 49 C)
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00033
    Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00034
  • Compound 8 was prepared as per the procedures illustrated in Example 1.
  • Compound 40 Protection of the Primary Hydroxyl and Hydrolysis of the Anyhdro Nucleoside
  • To a stirred solution of compound 8 (5.56 g, 10.8 mmoles) in CH2Cl2 (80 mL) was added DMAP (800 mg), Hunig's Base (3.8 mL, 21.6 mmoles), and pivaloyl chloride (PivCl, 2.0 mL, 16.2 mmoles) at 0° C. The reaction was then stirred at room temperature for 3 hours, at which time NaHCO3 (sat) and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude compound. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 3% MeOH/CH2Cl2) gave (3.34 g, 52%) as a white solid. 1H NMR and LCMS was consistent with structure. To a stirred solution of the crude ester (3.28 g) in CH3CN/H2O (90 mL, 7:2) was added camphorsuphonic acid (CSA, 500 mg). This was heated at 70° C. for 5 hours, at which time the solvent was removed under reduced pressure to give the crude compound. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 4 to 6% MeOH/CH2Cl2) gave Compound 40 (2.43 g, 84%) as a white solid. 1H NMR and LCMS were consistent with structure.
  • Compound 41 Tosylation of the Primary Hydroxy Group
  • To a stirred solution of compound 40 (2.36 g, 4.46 mmoles) in pyridine (50 mL) was added tosyl chloride (1.3 g, 6.7 mmoles). The reaction was then stirred at room temperature for 24 hours, at which time NaHCO3 (sat) and H2O were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude compound. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 3 to 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2) gave compound 41 (1.92 g, 63%) as a white solid. 1H NMR and LCMS were consistent with structure.
  • Compound 42 Ring Closure to the Bicyclo[2.2.2]Octane Ring System
  • Compound 41 (1.7 g, 2.5 mmoles) was dissolved in DMF (14 mL) and treated with NaH (60% in mineral oil, 200 mg, 5.0 mmoles) for 15 minutes. At that time, NH4Cl and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, water and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude compound. This was purified by precipitating from CH2Cl2/hexanes to give pure compound 42 (464 mg). 1H NMR and LCMS were consistent with structure.
  • Compound 43 TBS Protection
  • Compound 42 (416 mg, 0.98 mmoles) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (5 mL) followed by the addition of imidazole (133 g, 2.0 mmoles). The resulting yellow solution was cooled to 0° C. in ice-bath while stirring under nitrogen. tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (TBSCl, 191 mg, 1.3 mmoles) was added and stirring continued for an additional 16 hours at room temperature. The reaction was then quenched by addition of MeOH. Water and EtOAc were then added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give crude compound 43. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 4 to 6% MeOH/CH2Cl2) gave compound 43 (600 mg, 94%) as a white solid. 1H NMR and LCMS were consistent with structure.
  • Compound 44 The Barton-Macombie Deoxygenation.
  • Compound 42 (1.25 g, 2.3 mmoles) was deoxygenated as in the procedure for compound 12 to give compound 44 (792 mg). 1H NMR and LCMS were consistent with structure.
  • Compound 45 Removal of Nap and TBS Groups.
  • Compound 44 (743 mg, 1.42 mmoles) was dissolved in DCM (13 mL) and treated with water (1 mL) and DDQ (341 mg, 2.1 mmoles). After stirring for 6 hours, water and DCM were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure to give the crude alcohol. The organics were back-extracted several times with DCM. The combined organics were evaporated and used in the next step. The crude alcohol was deprotected according to (Kaburagi, Y.; Kishi, Y. Operationally Simple and Efficient Workup Procedure for TBAF-Mediated Desilylation: Application to Halichondrin Synthesis. Org. Lett. 2007, 9, 723-726) to give compound 45 (328 mg).
  • Compound 46 DMT Protection
  • To a stirred mixture of compound 45 (190 mg, 0.70 mmoles) in pyridine (5 mL) was added DMTCl (286 mg, 0.84 mmoles). The reaction was allowed to stir at room temperature for 4 hours, and water and EtOAc were added and the organic was washed with, saturated NaHCO3 and brine and then dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the solvent removed under reduced pressure. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 4 to 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2) gave compound 46 (298 mg, 74%) as a white solid. 1H NMR and LCMS were consistent with structure.
  • Compound 47 Preparation of U-Amidite
  • 2-Cyanoethyl N,N′-tetraisopropylphosphoramidite (104 μL, 0.33 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 46 (125 mg, 0.218 mmol), tetrazole (12 mg), N-methylimidazole (4 μL) in DMF (1 mL). After stirring for 4 hours at room temperature, the reaction was poured into EtOAc and the organic phase was washed with 90% brine, brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under vacuum. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 60% EtOAc/hexanes) gave Compound 47 (140 mg) as a white solid. 31P NMR was consistent with structure.
  • Compound 48 Conversion of U to CBz
  • Compound 46 (124 mg, 180 μmoles) was converted into compound 48 (104 mg, 73%) using the procedure for compound 15, except TBSCl was used instead of TMSCl.
  • Compound 49 Preparation of CBz Amidite
  • 2-Cyanoethyl N,N′-tetraisopropylphosphoramidite (0.53 mL, 0.15 mmol) was added to a solution of compound 48 (75 mg, 0.11 mmol), tetrazole (6 mg), N-methylimidazole (1 drop) in DMF (1 mL). After stirring for 4 hours at room temperature, the reaction was poured into EtOAc and the organic phase was washed with 90% brine, brine, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated under vacuum. Purification by column chromatography (SiO2, eluting with 60% EtOAc/hexanes) gave Compound 49 (80 mg) as a white solid. 31P NMR was consistent with structure.
  • Example 5 Synthesis of Nucleoside Phosphoramidites
  • The preparation of nucleoside phosphoramidites is performed following procedures that are illustrated herein and in the art such as but not limited to U.S. Pat. No. 6,426,220 and published PCT WO 02/36743.
  • Example 6 Synthesis of Oligomeric Compounds
  • The oligomeric compounds used in accordance with this invention may be conveniently and routinely made through the well-known technique of solid phase synthesis. Equipment for such synthesis is sold by several vendors including, for example, Applied Biosystems (Foster City, Calif.). Any other means for such synthesis known in the art may additionally or alternatively be employed. It is well known to use similar techniques to prepare oligonucleotides such as alkylated derivatives and those having phosphorothioate linkages.
  • Oligomeric compounds: Unsubstituted and substituted phosphodiester (P═O) oligomeric compounds, including without limitation, oligonucleotides can be synthesized on an automated DNA synthesizer (Applied Biosystems model 394) using standard phosphoramidite chemistry with oxidation by iodine.
  • In certain embodiments, phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages (P═S) are synthesized similar to phosphodiester internucleoside linkages with the following exceptions: thiation is effected by utilizing a 10% w/v solution of 3,H-1,2-benzodithiole-3-one 1,1-dioxide in acetonitrile for the oxidation of the phosphite linkages. The thiation reaction step time is increased to 180 sec and preceded by the normal capping step. After cleavage from the CPG column and deblocking in concentrated ammonium hydroxide at 55° C. (12-16 hr), the oligomeric compounds are recovered by precipitating with greater than 3 volumes of ethanol from a 1 M NH4OAc solution. Phosphinate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,508,270.
  • Alkyl phosphonate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,469,863.
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-methylene phosphonate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,610,289 or 5,625,050.
  • Phosphoramidite internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,256,775 or U.S. Pat. No. 5,366,878.
  • Alkylphosphonothioate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in published PCT applications PCT/US94/00902 and PCT/US93/06976 (published as WO 94/17093 and WO 94/02499, respectively).
  • 3′-Deoxy-3′-amino phosphoramidate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,476,925.
  • Phosphotriester internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,023,243.
  • Borano phosphate internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,130,302 and 5,177,198.
  • Oligomeric compounds having one or more non-phosphorus containing internucleoside linkages including without limitation methylenemethylimino linked oligonucleosides, also identified as MMI linked oligonucleosides, methylenedimethylhydrazo linked oligonucleosides, also identified as MDH linked oligonucleosides, methylenecarbonylamino linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-3 linked oligonucleosides, and methyleneaminocarbonyl linked oligonucleosides, also identified as amide-4 linked oligonucleosides, as well as mixed backbone oligomeric compounds having, for instance, alternating MMI and P═O or P═S linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,378,825, 5,386,023, 5,489,677, 5,602,240 and 5,610,289.
  • Formacetal and thioformacetal internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,264,562 and 5,264,564.
  • Ethylene oxide internucleoside linkages can be prepared as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,618.
  • Example 7 Isolation and Purification of Oligomeric Compounds
  • After cleavage from the controlled pore glass solid support or other support medium and deblocking in concentrated ammonium hydroxide at 55° C. for 12-16 hours, the oligomeric compounds, including without limitation oligonucleotides and oligonucleosides, are recovered by precipitation out of 1 M NH4OAc with >3 volumes of ethanol. Synthesized oligomeric compounds are analyzed by electrospray mass spectroscopy (molecular weight determination) and by capillary gel electrophoresis. The relative amounts of phosphorothioate and phosphodiester linkages obtained in the synthesis is determined by the ratio of correct molecular weight relative to the −16 amu product (+/−32+/−48). For some studies oligomeric compounds are purified by HPLC, as described by Chiang et al., J. Biol. Chem. 1991, 266, 18162-18171. Results obtained with HPLC-purified material are generally similar to those obtained with non-HPLC purified material.
  • Example 8 Synthesis of Oligomeric Compounds Using the 96 Well Plate Format
  • Oligomeric compounds, including without limitation oligonucleotides, can be synthesized via solid phase P(III) phosphoramidite chemistry on an automated synthesizer capable of assembling 96 sequences simultaneously in a 96-well format. Phosphodiester internucleoside linkages are afforded by oxidation with aqueous iodine. Phosphorothioate internucleoside linkages are generated by sulfurization utilizing 3,H-1,2 benzodithiole-3-one 1,1 dioxide (Beaucage Reagent) in anhydrous acetonitrile. Standard base-protected beta-cyanoethyl-diiso-propyl phosphoramidites can be purchased from commercial vendors (e.g. PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., or Pharmacia, Piscataway, N.J.). Non-standard nucleosides are synthesized as per standard or patented methods and can be functionalized as base protected beta-cyanoethyldiisopropyl phosphoramidites.
  • Oligomeric compounds can be cleaved from support and deprotected with concentrated NH4OH at elevated temperature (55-60° C.) for 12-16 hours and the released product then dried in vacuo. The dried product is then re-suspended in sterile water to afford a master plate from which all analytical and test plate samples are then diluted utilizing robotic pipettors.
  • Example 9 Analysis of Oligomeric Compounds Using the 96-Well Plate Format
  • The concentration of oligomeric compounds in each well can be assessed by dilution of samples and UV absorption spectroscopy. The full-length integrity of the individual products can be evaluated by capillary electrophoresis (CE) in either the 96-well format (Beckman P/ACE™ MDQ) or, for individually prepared samples, on a commercial CE apparatus (e.g., Beckman P/ACE™ 5000, ABI 270). Base and backbone composition is confirmed by mass analysis of the oligomeric compounds utilizing electrospray-mass spectroscopy. All assay test plates are diluted from the master plate using single and multi-channel robotic pipettors. Plates are judged to be acceptable if at least 85% of the oligomeric compounds on the plate are at least 85% full length.
  • Example 10 In Vitro Treatment of Cells with Oligomeric Compounds
  • The effect of oligomeric compounds on target nucleic acid expression is tested in any of a variety of cell types provided that the target nucleic acid is present at measurable levels. This can be routinely determined using, for example, PCR or Northern blot analysis. Cell lines derived from multiple tissues and species can be obtained from American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, Manassas, Va.).
  • The following cell type is provided for illustrative purposes, but other cell types can be routinely used, provided that the target is expressed in the cell type chosen. This can be readily determined by methods routine in the art, for example Northern blot analysis, ribonuclease protection assays or RT-PCR.
  • b.END cells: The mouse brain endothelial cell line b.END was obtained from Dr. Werner Risau at the Max Plank Institute (Bad Nauheim, Germany). b.END cells are routinely cultured in DMEM, high glucose (Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.) supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.). Cells are routinely passaged by trypsinization and dilution when they reached approximately 90% confluence. Cells are seeded into 96-well plates (Falcon-Primaria #353872, BD Biosciences, Bedford, Mass.) at a density of approximately 3000 cells/well for uses including but not limited to oligomeric compound transfection experiments.
  • Experiments involving treatment of cells with oligomeric compounds:
  • When cells reach appropriate confluency, they are treated with oligomeric compounds using a transfection method as described.
  • LIPOFECTIN™
  • When cells reached 65-75% confluency, they are treated with one or more oligomeric compounds. The oligomeric compound is mixed with LIPOFECTIN™ Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.) in Opti-MEM™-1 reduced serum medium (Invitrogen Life Technologies, Carlsbad, Calif.) to achieve the desired concentration of the oligomeric compound(s) and a LIPOFECTIN™ concentration of 2.5 or 3 μg/mL per 100 nM oligomeric compound(s). This transfection mixture is incubated at room temperature for approximately 0.5 hours. For cells grown in 96-well plates, wells are washed once with 100 μL OPTI-MEM™-1 and then treated with 130 μL of the transfection mixture. Cells grown in 24-well plates or other standard tissue culture plates are treated similarly, using appropriate volumes of medium and oligomeric compound(s). Cells are treated and data are obtained in duplicate or triplicate. After approximately 4-7 hours of treatment at 37° C., the medium containing the transfection mixture is replaced with fresh culture medium. Cells are harvested 16-24 hours after treatment with oligomeric compound(s).
  • Other suitable transfection reagents known in the art include, but are not limited to, CYTOFECTIN™, LIPOFECTAMINE™, OLIGOFECTAMINE™, and FUGENE™. Other suitable transfection methods known in the art include, but are not limited to, electroporation.
  • Example 11 Real-Time Quantitative PCR Analysis of Target mRNA Levels
  • Quantitation of target mRNA levels is accomplished by real-time quantitative PCR using the ABI PRISM™ 7600, 7700, or 7900 Sequence Detection System (PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif.) according to manufacturer's instructions. This is a closed-tube, non-gel-based, fluorescence detection system which allows high-throughput quantitation of polymerase chain reaction (PCR) products in real-time. As opposed to standard PCR in which amplification products are quantitated after the PCR is completed, products in real-time quantitative PCR are quantitated as they accumulate. This is accomplished by including in the PCR reaction an oligonucleotide probe that anneals specifically between the forward and reverse PCR primers, and contains two fluorescent dyes. A reporter dye (e.g., FAM or JOE, obtained from either PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, Calif. or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa) is attached to the 5′ end of the probe and a quencher dye (e.g., TAMRA, obtained from either PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif., Operon Technologies Inc., Alameda, Calif. or Integrated DNA Technologies Inc., Coralville, Iowa) is attached to the 3′ end of the probe. When the probe and dyes are intact, reporter dye emission is quenched by the proximity of the 3′ quencher dye. During amplification, annealing of the probe to the target sequence creates a substrate that can be cleaved by the 5′-exonuclease activity of Taq polymerase. During the extension phase of the PCR amplification cycle, cleavage of the probe by Taq polymerase releases the reporter dye from the remainder of the probe (and hence from the quencher moiety) and a sequence-specific fluorescent signal is generated. With each cycle, additional reporter dye molecules are cleaved from their respective probes, and the fluorescence intensity is monitored at regular intervals by laser optics built into the ABI PRISM™ Sequence Detection System. In each assay, a series of parallel reactions containing serial dilutions of mRNA from untreated control samples generates a standard curve that is used to quantitate the percent inhibition after antisense oligonucleotide treatment of test samples.
  • Prior to quantitative PCR analysis, primer-probe sets specific to the target gene being measured are evaluated for their ability to be “multiplexed” with a GAPDH amplification reaction. In multiplexing, both the target gene and the internal standard gene GAPDH are amplified concurrently in a single sample. In this analysis, mRNA isolated from untreated cells is serially diluted. Each dilution is amplified in the presence of primer-probe sets specific for GAPDH only, target gene only (“single-plexing”), or both (multiplexing). Following PCR amplification, standard curves of GAPDH and target mRNA signal as a function of dilution are generated from both the single-plexed and multiplexed samples. If both the slope and correlation coefficient of the GAPDH and target signals generated from the multiplexed samples fall within 10% of their corresponding values generated from the single-plexed samples, the primer-probe set specific for that target is deemed multiplexable. Other methods of PCR are also known in the art.
  • RT and PCR reagents are obtained from Invitrogen Life Technologies (Carlsbad, Calif.). RT, real-time PCR is carried out by adding 20 μL PCR cocktail (2.5×PCR buffer minus MgCl2, 6.6 mM MgCl2, 375 μM each of dATP, dCTP, dCTP and dGTP, 375 nM each of forward primer and reverse primer, 125 nM of probe, 4 Units RNAse inhibitor, 1.25 Units PLATINUM® Taq, 5 Units MuLV reverse transcriptase, and 2.5×ROX dye) to 96-well plates containing 30 μL total RNA solution (20-200 ng). The RT reaction is carried out by incubation for 30 minutes at 48° C. Following a 10 minute incubation at 95° C. to activate the PLATINUM® Taq, 40 cycles of a two-step PCR protocol are carried out: 95° C. for 15 seconds (denaturation) followed by 60° C. for 1.5 minutes (annealing/-extension).
  • Gene target quantities obtained by RT, real-time PCR are normalized using either the expression level of GAPDH, a gene whose expression is constant, or by quantifying total RNA using RIBOGREEN™ (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene, Oreg.). GAPDH expression is quantified by real time RT-PCR, by being run simultaneously with the target, multiplexing, or separately. Total RNA is quantified using RiboGreen™ RNA quantification reagent (Molecular Probes, Inc. Eugene, Oreg.). Methods of RNA quantification by RIBOGREEN™ are taught in Jones, L. J., et al, (Analytical Biochemistry, 1998, 265, 368-374).
  • In this assay, 170 μL of RIBOGREEN™ working reagent (RIBOGREEN™ reagent diluted 1:350 in 10 mM Tris-HCl, 1 mM EDTA, pH 7.5) is pipetted into a 96-well plate containing 30 μL purified, cellular RNA. The plate is read in a CytoFluor 4000 (PE Applied Biosystems) with excitation at 485 nm and emission at 530 nm.
  • Example 12 Analysis of Inhibition of Target Expression
  • Antisense modulation of a target expression can be assayed in a variety of ways known in the art. For example, a target mRNA levels can be quantitated by, e.g., Northern blot analysis, competitive polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or real-time PCR. Real-time quantitative PCR is presently desired. RNA analysis can be performed on total cellular RNA or poly(A)+mRNA. One method of RNA analysis of the present disclosure is the use of total cellular RNA as described in other examples herein. Methods of RNA isolation are well known in the art. Northern blot analysis is also routine in the art. Real-time quantitative (PCR) can be conveniently accomplished using the commercially available ABI PRISM™ 7600, 7700, or 7900 Sequence Detection System, available from PE-Applied Biosystems, Foster City, Calif. and used according to manufacturer's instructions.
  • Protein levels of a target can be quantitated in a variety of ways well known in the art, such as immunoprecipitation, Western blot analysis (immunoblotting), enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA) or fluorescence-activated cell sorting (FACS). Antibodies directed to a target can be identified and obtained from a variety of sources, such as the MSRS catalog of antibodies (Aerie Corporation, Birmingham, Mich.), or can be prepared via conventional monoclonal or polyclonal antibody generation methods well known in the art. Methods for preparation of polyclonal antisera are taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 11.12.1-11.12.9, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997. Preparation of monoclonal antibodies is taught in, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 11.4.1-11.11.5, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997.
  • Immunoprecipitation methods are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 10.16.1-10.16.11, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998. Western blot (immunoblot) analysis is standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 10.8.1-10.8.21, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1997. Enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays (ELISA) are standard in the art and can be found at, for example, Ausubel, F. M. et al., Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, Volume 2, pp. 11.2.1-11.2.22, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1991.
  • Example 13 Design of Phenotypic Assays and In Vivo Studies for the Use of Target Inhibitors Phenotypic Assays
  • Once target inhibitors have been identified by the methods disclosed herein, the oligomeric compounds are further investigated in one or more phenotypic assays, each having measurable endpoints predictive of efficacy in the treatment of a particular disease state or condition.
  • Phenotypic assays, kits and reagents for their use are well known to those skilled in the art and are herein used to investigate the role and/or association of a target in health and disease. Representative phenotypic assays, which can be purchased from any one of several commercial vendors, include those for determining cell viability, cytotoxicity, proliferation or cell survival (Molecular Probes, Eugene, Oreg.; PerkinElmer, Boston, Mass.), protein-based assays including enzymatic assays (Panvera, LLC, Madison, Wis.; BD Biosciences, Franklin Lakes, N.J.; Oncogene Research Products, San Diego, Calif.), cell regulation, signal transduction, inflammation, oxidative processes and apoptosis (Assay Designs Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich.), triglyceride accumulation (Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.), angiogenesis assays, tube formation assays, cytokine and hormone assays and metabolic assays (Chemicon International Inc., Temecula, Calif.; Amersham Biosciences, Piscataway, N.J.).
  • In one non-limiting example, cells determined to be appropriate for a particular phenotypic assay (i.e., MCF-7 cells selected for breast cancer studies; adipocytes for obesity studies) are treated with a target inhibitors identified from the in vitro studies as well as control compounds at optimal concentrations which are determined by the methods described above. At the end of the treatment period, treated and untreated cells are analyzed by one or more methods specific for the assay to determine phenotypic outcomes and endpoints.
  • Phenotypic endpoints include changes in cell morphology over time or treatment dose as well as changes in levels of cellular components such as proteins, lipids, nucleic acids, hormones, saccharides or metals. Measurements of cellular status which include pH, stage of the cell cycle, intake or excretion of biological indicators by the cell, are also endpoints of interest.
  • Measurement of the expression of one or more of the genes of the cell after treatment is also used as an indicator of the efficacy or potency of the target inhibitors. Hallmark genes, or those genes suspected to be associated with a specific disease state, condition, or phenotype, are measured in both treated and untreated cells.
  • In Vivo Studies
  • The individual subjects of the in vivo studies described herein are warm-blooded vertebrate animals, which includes humans.
  • Example 14 RNA Isolation
  • Poly(A)+mRNA Isolation
  • Poly(A)+mRNA is isolated according to Miura et al., (Clin. Chem., 1996, 42, 1758-1764). Other methods for poly(A)+mRNA isolation are routine in the art. Briefly, for cells grown on 96-well plates, growth medium is removed from the cells and each well is washed with 200 μL cold PBS. 60 μL lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.5 M NaCl, 0.5% NP-40, 20 mM vanadyl-ribonucleoside complex) is added to each well, the plate is gently agitated and then incubated at room temperature for five minutes. 55 μL of lysate is transferred to Oligo d(T) coated 96-well plates (AGCT Inc., Irvine Calif.). Plates are incubated for 60 minutes at room temperature, washed 3 times with 200 μL of wash buffer (10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6, 1 mM EDTA, 0.3 M NaCl). After the final wash, the plate is blotted on paper towels to remove excess wash buffer and then air-dried for 5 minutes. 60 μL of elution buffer (5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.6), preheated to 70° C., is added to each well, the plate is incubated on a 90° C. hot plate for 5 minutes, and the eluate is then transferred to a fresh 96-well plate.
  • Cells grown on 100 mm or other standard plates may be treated similarly, using appropriate volumes of all solutions.
  • Total RNA Isolation
  • Total RNA is isolated using an RNEASY 96™ kit and buffers purchased from Qiagen Inc. (Valencia, Calif.) following the manufacturer's recommended procedures. Briefly, for cells grown on 96-well plates, growth medium is removed from the cells and each well is washed with 200 μL cold PBS. 150 μL Buffer RLT is added to each well and the plate vigorously agitated for 20 seconds. 150 μL of 70% ethanol is then added to each well and the contents mixed by pipetting three times up and down. The samples are then transferred to the RNEASY 96™ well plate attached to a QIAVAC™ manifold fitted with a waste collection tray and attached to a vacuum source. Vacuum is applied for 1 minute. 500 μL of Buffer RW1 is added to each well of the RNEASY 96™ plate and incubated for 15 minutes and the vacuum is again applied for 1 minute. An additional 500 μL of Buffer RW1 is added to each well of the RNEASY 96™ plate and the vacuum is applied for 2 minutes. 1 mL of Buffer RPE is then added to each well of the RNEASY 96™ plate and the vacuum applied for a period of 90 seconds. The Buffer RPE wash is then repeated and the vacuum is applied for an additional 3 minutes. The plate is then removed from the QIAVAC™ manifold and blotted dry on paper towels. The plate is then re-attached to the QIAVAC™ manifold fitted with a collection tube rack containing 1.2 mL collection tubes. RNA is then eluted by pipetting 140 μL of RNAse free water into each well, incubating 1 minute, and then applying the vacuum for 3 minutes.
  • The repetitive pipetting and elution steps may be automated using a QIAGEN Bio-Robot 9604 (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia Calif.). Essentially, after lysing of the cells on the culture plate, the plate is transferred to the robot deck where the pipetting, DNase treatment and elution steps are carried out.
  • Example 15 Target-Specific Primers and Probes
  • Probes and primers may be designed to hybridize to a target sequence, using published sequence information.
  • For example, for human PTEN, the following primer-probe set was designed using published sequence information (GENBANK™ accession number U92436.1, SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • Forward primer: AATGGCTAAGTGAAGATGACAATCAT (SEQ ID NO: 2)
  • Reverse primer: TGCACATATCATTACACCAGTTCGT (SEQ ID NO: 3)
  • And the PCR probe:
  • FAM-TTGCAGCAATTCACTGTAAAGCTGGAAAGG-TAMRA (SEQ ID NO: 4), where FAM is the fluorescent dye and TAMRA is the quencher dye.
  • Example 16 Western Blot Analysis of Target Protein Levels
  • Western blot analysis (immunoblot analysis) is carried out using standard methods. Cells are harvested 16-20 h after oligonucleotide treatment, washed once with PBS, suspended in Laemmli buffer (100 μl/well), boiled for 5 minutes and loaded on a 16% SDS-PAGE gel. Gels are run for 1.5 hours at 150 V, and transferred to membrane for western blotting. Appropriate primary antibody directed to a target is used, with a radiolabeled or fluorescently labeled secondary antibody directed against the primary antibody species. Bands are visualized using a PHOSPHORIMAGER™ (Molecular Dynamics, Sunnyvale Calif.).
  • Example 17 In Vitro PTEN Study Using 2-10-2 Gapped Oligomers with Bicyclic Nucleoside Analogs in the Wings
  • A 2-10-2 Gapped oligomeric compound was synthesized and tested for its ability to reduce PTEN expression in B.END cells. B.END cells were treated with the oligomeric compound indicated at a concentration of 20 and 40 nM using methods described herein. PTEN mRNA levels were measured using quantitative real-time PCR following routine methods described herein. The data represents averages from two experiments.
  • Tm's were assessed in 100 mM phosphate buffer, 0.1 mM EDTA, pH 7, at 260 nm using bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid modified oligomers and 4 μM complementary RNA.
  • SEQ  %  Tm
    ID NO./ Composition Conc. Inhi-
    ISIS NO: (5′ to 3′) (nM) bition C.)
    05/402380 CxUxTAGCACTGGCCxUx 20 18 41.5
    05/402380 CxUxTAGCACTGGCCxUx 40 22
    05/405837 CyUyTAGCACTGGCCyUy 20 45 50.6
    05/405837 CyUyTAGCACTGGCCyUy 40 39

    All internucleoside linkages are phosphorothioate. Nucleosides not followed by a subscript are β-D-2′-deoxyribonucleosides. Nucleosides followed by a subscript are bicyclic nucleoside analogs having the formula and configuration:
  • Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00035
  • wherein Bx is the heterocyclic base.

Claims (26)

What is claimed is:
1. A bicyclic nucleoside analog of Formula Ie:
Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00036
wherein:
Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety;
Q is a bridge group comprising one C(R3)═C(R4), N(R5)—O or N(R5)—S biradical group and one C(R3)(R4) biradical group or one O, S or N(R5) biradical group and two C(R3)(R4) biradical groups;
each R3 and R4 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
R5 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy or substituted C1-C6 alkoxy;
L1 and L2 are each H or one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is CH3 or OCH3;
one of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is O-T2, two of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are H and the remaining one of E1, E2, E3 and E4 is H, halogen, C1-C6 alkyl or substituted C1-C6 alkyl;
one of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a phosphorus moiety and the other of T1 and T2 is H, a hydroxyl protecting group or a reactive phosphorus group.
each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
L is O, S or NJ7; and
each J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl.
2. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein Bx is an optionally protected uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine.
3. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein three of E1, E2, E3 and E4 are H.
4. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein L1 and L2 are each H.
5. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is CH3.
6. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein T1 is 4,4′-dimethoxytrityl and T2 is diisopropylcyanoethoxy phosphoramidite.
7. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein Q comprises two C(R3)(R4) biradical groups.
8. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 7 wherein each R3 and R4 is H.
9. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein Q comprises one O biradical group;
10. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 wherein said phosphorus moiety has the formula:
Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00037
wherein:
Ra and Rc are each, independently, OH, SH, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
Rb is O or S.
11. The bicyclic nucleoside analog of claim 1 having the configuration of one of formulas If, Ig, Ih and Ii:
Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00038
12. An oligomeric compound consisting of from 8 to 40 monomers comprising at least one bicyclic nucleoside analog of Formula IIe:
Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00039
wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog having Formula IIe:
Bx is a heterocyclic base moiety;
Q is a bridge group comprising one C(R3)═C(R4), N(R5)—O or N(R5)—S biradical group and one C(R3)(R4) biradical group or one O, S or N(R5) biradical group and two C(R3)(R4) biradical groups;
each R3 and R4 is, independently, H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy or halogen;
R5 is H, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy or substituted C1-C6 alkoxy;
L1 and L2 are each H or one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is CH3 or OCH3;
one of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is O-T4, two of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are H and the remaining one of E5, E6, E7 and E8 is H, halogen, C1-C6 alkyl or substituted C1-C6 alkyl;
one of T3 and T4 is an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the remainder of the oligomeric compound and the other of T3 and T4 is H, a protecting group, a phosphorus moiety, a 5′ or 3′-terminal group or an internucleoside linking group linking the bicyclic nucleoside analog to the remainder of the oligomeric compound;
each substituted group comprises one or more optionally protected substituent groups independently selected from halogen, OJ5, N(J5)(J6), =NJ5, SJ5, N3, CN, OC(=L)J5, OC(=L)N(J5)(J6) and C(=L)N(J5)(J6);
L is O, S or NJ7; and
each J5, J6 and J7 is, independently, H, C1-C12 alkyl, C2-C12 alkenyl, C2-C12 alkynyl, C5-C20 aryl or C1-C12 aminoalkyl.
13. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of Formula IIe, Bx is uracil, thymine, cytosine, 5-methylcytosine, adenine or guanine.
14. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of Formula IIe, three of E5, E6, E7 and E8 are H.
15. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of Formula IIe, L1 and L2 are each H.
16. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein independently for each bicyclic nucleoside analog of Formula IIe, one of L1 and L2 is H and the other of L1 and L2 is CH3.
17. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein each Q comprises two C(R3)(R4) biradical groups.
18. The oligomeric compound of claim 17 wherein each R3 and R4 is H.
19. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein each Q comprises one O biradical group;
20. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein said phosphorus moiety has the formula:
Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00040
wherein:
Ra and Rc are each, independently, OH, SH, C1-C6 alkyl, substituted C1-C6 alkyl, C1-C6 alkoxy, substituted C1-C6 alkoxy, amino or substituted amino; and
Rb is O or S.
21. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein each bicyclic nucleoside of Formula IIe has the configuration of one of formulas IIf, IIg, IIh and IIi:
Figure US20150191727A1-20150709-C00041
22. The oligomeric compound of claim 21 comprising a gapped oligomeric compound having two external regions independently comprising from 2 to 5 contiguous bicyclic nucleoside analogs wherein each bicyclic nucleoside analog has Formula IIf, IIg, IIh or IIi, wherein the two external regions are separated by an internal region comprising from about 8 to about 14 monomer subunits independently selected from nucleosides and modified nucleosides that are different from the bicyclic nucleoside analogs.
23. The oligomeric compound of claim 22 wherein said internal region comprises from about 8 to about 14 contiguous β-D-2′-deoxyribofuranosyl nucleosides.
24. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein each internucleoside linking group is, independently, a phosphodiester or a phosphorothioate internucleoside linking group.
25. The oligomeric compound of claim 12 wherein essentially each internucleoside linking group is a phosphorothioate internucleoside linking group.
26. A method of inhibiting gene expression comprising contacting one or more cells, a tissue or an animal with an oligomeric compound of claim 21.
US14/662,061 2009-08-06 2015-03-18 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs Abandoned US20150191727A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US14/662,061 US20150191727A1 (en) 2009-08-06 2015-03-18 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US23188509P 2009-08-06 2009-08-06
PCT/US2010/044549 WO2011017521A2 (en) 2009-08-06 2010-08-05 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs
US201213388115A 2012-03-21 2012-03-21
US14/662,061 US20150191727A1 (en) 2009-08-06 2015-03-18 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/388,115 Continuation US9012421B2 (en) 2009-08-06 2010-08-05 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs
PCT/US2010/044549 Continuation WO2011017521A2 (en) 2009-08-06 2010-08-05 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20150191727A1 true US20150191727A1 (en) 2015-07-09

Family

ID=43544942

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/388,115 Active 2032-01-21 US9012421B2 (en) 2009-08-06 2010-08-05 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs
US14/662,061 Abandoned US20150191727A1 (en) 2009-08-06 2015-03-18 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/388,115 Active 2032-01-21 US9012421B2 (en) 2009-08-06 2010-08-05 Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (2) US9012421B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2462153B1 (en)
WO (1) WO2011017521A2 (en)

Cited By (81)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2017079745A1 (en) 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds for use in therapy
WO2017120365A1 (en) 2016-01-05 2017-07-13 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for reducing lrrk2 expression
US9765338B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2017-09-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of dystrophia myotonica-protein kinase (DMPK) expression
WO2017161172A1 (en) 2016-03-16 2017-09-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of modulating keap1
WO2017180835A1 (en) 2016-04-13 2017-10-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for reducing c9orf72 expression
WO2017192820A1 (en) 2016-05-06 2017-11-09 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glp-1 receptor ligand moiety conjugated oligonucleotides and uses thereof
WO2018014041A2 (en) 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of smn2
US9932580B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-04-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating HBV expression
WO2018064593A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-04-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing tau expression
WO2018089805A1 (en) 2016-11-10 2018-05-17 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing atxn3 expression
US10006027B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2018-06-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for modulating Ataxin 2 expression
US10077236B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2018-09-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Azacyclic constrained analogs of FTY720
US10280423B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2019-05-07 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor B expression
US10308934B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2019-06-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating Ataxin 2 expression
WO2019118916A1 (en) 2017-12-14 2019-06-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
WO2019140452A1 (en) 2018-01-15 2019-07-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of dnm2 expression
US10385341B2 (en) 2014-04-01 2019-08-20 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating SOD-1 expression
US10407678B2 (en) 2015-04-16 2019-09-10 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript
WO2019217527A1 (en) 2018-05-09 2019-11-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing fxi expression
US10517889B2 (en) 2017-09-08 2019-12-31 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of SMAD7 expression
US10533175B2 (en) 2015-09-25 2020-01-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating Ataxin 3 expression
US10538763B2 (en) 2015-01-16 2020-01-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of DUX4
WO2020041348A1 (en) 2018-08-20 2020-02-27 Rogcon, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotides targeting scn2a for the treatment of scn1a encephalopathies
US10577607B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2020-03-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of DYRK1B expression
EP3620520A1 (en) 2018-09-10 2020-03-11 Universidad del Pais Vasco Novel target to treat a metabolic disease in an individual
WO2020061200A1 (en) 2018-09-19 2020-03-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pnpla3 expression
WO2020106996A1 (en) 2018-11-21 2020-05-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing prion expression
US10772906B2 (en) 2008-10-15 2020-09-15 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of Factor 11 expression
WO2020191177A1 (en) 2019-03-21 2020-09-24 Sudhir Agrawal Antisense oligonucleotides for allele specificity
US10793855B2 (en) 2015-01-06 2020-10-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript
US10793856B2 (en) 2013-07-19 2020-10-06 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating Tau expression
WO2020205463A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating ube3a-ats
US10815480B2 (en) 2010-11-17 2020-10-27 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of alpha synuclein expression
WO2020243292A1 (en) 2019-05-28 2020-12-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing fus expression
WO2021021673A1 (en) 2019-07-26 2021-02-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating gfap
US10954519B2 (en) 2013-08-09 2021-03-23 lonis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of dystrophia myotonica-protein kinase (DMPK) expression
WO2021074772A1 (en) 2019-10-14 2021-04-22 Astrazeneca Ab Modulators of pnpla3 expression
US10995068B2 (en) 2015-09-24 2021-05-04 The Regents Of The University Of California Synthetic sphingolipid-like molecules, drugs, methods of their synthesis and methods of treatment
US11033570B2 (en) 2016-12-02 2021-06-15 Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Modulation of Lnc05 expression
US11058709B1 (en) 2015-12-04 2021-07-13 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating breast cancer
US11078486B2 (en) 2018-07-25 2021-08-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing ATXN2 expression
WO2021174019A1 (en) 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating smn2
US11129844B2 (en) 2015-03-03 2021-09-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating MECP2 expression
US11136577B2 (en) 2016-03-09 2021-10-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for inhibiting PMP22 expression
US11149264B2 (en) 2018-02-12 2021-10-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified compounds and uses thereof
US11162096B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2021-11-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc Methods for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript
US11197884B2 (en) 2017-08-18 2021-12-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of the notch signaling pathway for treatment of respiratory disorders
US11208650B2 (en) 2018-11-15 2021-12-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of IRF5 expression
US11214803B2 (en) 2019-01-31 2022-01-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of YAP1 expression
US11230712B2 (en) 2017-11-09 2022-01-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing SNCA expression
US11236339B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2022-02-01 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of GYS1 expression
US11241451B2 (en) 2018-03-02 2022-02-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of IRF4 expression
US11279932B2 (en) 2019-02-27 2022-03-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of MALAT1 expression
WO2022063782A1 (en) 2020-09-22 2022-03-31 Astrazeneca Ab Method of treating fatty liver disease
US11332746B1 (en) 2018-06-27 2022-05-17 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing LRRK2 expression
WO2022122872A1 (en) 2020-12-09 2022-06-16 Ucl Business Ltd Therapeutics for the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders
US11365416B2 (en) 2018-04-11 2022-06-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of EZH2 expression
US11400161B2 (en) 2016-10-06 2022-08-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of conjugating oligomeric compounds
US11434488B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2022-09-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing ATXN3 expression
US11447521B2 (en) 2020-11-18 2022-09-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating angiotensinogen expression
US11459564B2 (en) 2017-12-21 2022-10-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of frataxin expression
WO2022271836A2 (en) 2021-06-22 2022-12-29 AcuraStem, Inc. Pikfyve antisense oligonucleotides
US11542504B2 (en) 2020-05-01 2023-01-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating ATXN1
US11547718B2 (en) 2018-11-14 2023-01-10 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of FOXP3 expression
WO2023004049A1 (en) 2021-07-21 2023-01-26 AcuraStem, Inc. Unc13a antisense oligonucleotides
US11661601B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2023-05-30 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for modulating FMR1 expression
WO2023104964A1 (en) 2021-12-09 2023-06-15 Ucl Business Ltd Therapeutics for the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders
US11732260B2 (en) 2018-03-02 2023-08-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for the modulation of amyloid-β precursor protein
US11732263B2 (en) 2020-06-29 2023-08-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating PLP1
US11753644B2 (en) 2021-06-18 2023-09-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing IFNAR1 expression
US11781135B2 (en) 2012-03-30 2023-10-10 Washington University Methods for treating Alzheimer's disease
WO2023212625A1 (en) 2022-04-28 2023-11-02 AcuraStem Incorporated Syf2 antisense oligonucleotides
US11833221B2 (en) 2021-09-01 2023-12-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomeric compounds for reducing DMPK expression
US11833168B2 (en) 2018-06-14 2023-12-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for increasing STMN2 expression
EP4309732A2 (en) 2017-03-24 2024-01-24 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pcsk9 expression
US12013403B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2024-06-18 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions and methods for detection of SMN protein in a subject and treatment of a subject
US12018261B2 (en) 2020-12-18 2024-06-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating factor XII
WO2024155986A2 (en) 2023-01-20 2024-07-25 AcuraStem Incorporated Unc13a antisense oligonucleotides
WO2024163651A2 (en) 2023-01-31 2024-08-08 AcuraStem Incorporated Syf2 antisense oligonucleotides
WO2024167945A1 (en) 2023-02-06 2024-08-15 AcuraStem Incorporated Pikfyve antisense oligonucleotides
WO2024220746A2 (en) 2023-04-21 2024-10-24 Flagship Pioneering Innovations Vii, Llc Rnai agents targeting fatty acid synthase and related methods

Families Citing this family (215)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DK2410054T4 (en) 2006-10-18 2020-02-10 Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc Antisense Compounds
AU2009323766B2 (en) 2008-12-02 2016-10-06 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Method for the synthesis of phosphorus atom modified nucleic acids
BR112012000828A8 (en) 2009-07-06 2017-10-10 Ontorii Inc NEW NUCLEIC ACID PRO-DRUGS AND METHODS OF THEIR USE
EP2462153B1 (en) * 2009-08-06 2015-07-29 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs
WO2012039448A1 (en) 2010-09-24 2012-03-29 株式会社キラルジェン Asymmetric auxiliary group
EP2673361B1 (en) 2011-02-08 2016-04-13 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomeric compounds comprising bicyclic nucleotides and uses thereof
WO2013012758A1 (en) 2011-07-19 2013-01-24 Ontorii, Inc. Methods for the synthesis of functionalized nucleic acids
EP3205725B1 (en) 2011-08-11 2019-03-27 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Selective antisense compounds and uses thereof
EP2794880B1 (en) 2011-12-22 2018-05-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for modulating metastasis-associated-in-lung-adenocarcinoma-transcript-1(malat-1) expression
US9221864B2 (en) 2012-04-09 2015-12-29 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Tricyclic nucleic acid analogs
EP3336189A1 (en) 2012-04-20 2018-06-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomeric compounds comprising bicyclic nucleotides and uses thereof
US9574193B2 (en) 2012-05-17 2017-02-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for modulating apolipoprotein (a) expression
US20160002624A1 (en) 2012-05-17 2016-01-07 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide compositions
WO2013177248A2 (en) 2012-05-22 2013-11-28 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of enhancer rna mediated gene expression
WO2013181665A1 (en) 2012-06-01 2013-12-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense compounds targeting genes associated with fibronectin
US9487780B2 (en) 2012-06-01 2016-11-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense compounds targeting genes associated with fibronectin
US9617539B2 (en) 2012-06-25 2017-04-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of UBE3A-ATS expression
WO2014010250A1 (en) 2012-07-13 2014-01-16 Chiralgen, Ltd. Asymmetric auxiliary group
AU2013289880B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2018-08-02 Wave Life Sciences Ltd. Chiral control
CA2879066C (en) 2012-07-13 2019-08-13 Shin Nippon Biomedical Laboratories, Ltd. Chiral nucleic acid adjuvant
US9403865B2 (en) 2012-08-15 2016-08-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of preparing oligomeric compounds using modified capping protocols
US9523094B2 (en) 2012-10-11 2016-12-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating kennedy's disease
EP2906699A4 (en) 2012-10-11 2016-06-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc Oligomeric compounds comprising bicyclic nucleosides and uses thereof
EP3459549B1 (en) 2012-10-12 2022-04-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Selective antisense compounds and uses thereof
PT2906696T (en) 2012-10-15 2019-12-16 Univ California Methods for modulating c9orf72 expression
EP2906697A4 (en) 2012-10-15 2016-06-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc Methods for monitoring c9orf72 expression
CN110951731A (en) 2012-10-15 2020-04-03 Ionis制药公司 Compositions for modulating expression of C9ORF72
WO2014093537A1 (en) 2012-12-11 2014-06-19 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Competitive modulation of micrornas
KR102190852B1 (en) 2013-01-31 2020-12-14 아이오니스 파마수티컬즈, 인코포레이티드 Method of preparing oligomeric compounds using modified coupling protocols
EP3400947B1 (en) 2013-02-14 2023-08-23 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of apolipoprotein c-iii (apociii) expression in lipoprotein lipase deficient (lpld) populations
BR112015022156A2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-11-14 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc compositions and methods for modulating tau expression
WO2014172698A1 (en) 2013-04-19 2014-10-23 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulation nucleic acids through nonsense mediated decay
KR20160013110A (en) 2013-05-24 2016-02-03 로슈 이노베이션 센터 코펜하겐 에이/에스 Oligonucleotide modulators of b-cell cll/lymphoma 11a(bcl11a) and uses thereof
EP3656386A1 (en) 2013-06-21 2020-05-27 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating apolipoprotein c-iii expression for improving a diabetic profile
WO2015017675A2 (en) 2013-07-31 2015-02-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compounds useful in conditions related to repeat expansion
CA2921839A1 (en) 2013-08-28 2015-03-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of prekallikrein (pkk) expression
WO2015042447A1 (en) 2013-09-20 2015-03-26 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Targeted therapeutic nucleosides and their use
KR20160062069A (en) 2013-10-11 2016-06-01 아이오니스 파마수티컬즈, 인코포레이티드 Compositions for modulating c9orf72 expression
US9758546B2 (en) 2013-10-21 2017-09-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for solution phase detritylation of oligomeric compounds
WO2015108047A1 (en) 2014-01-15 2015-07-23 株式会社新日本科学 Chiral nucleic acid adjuvant having immunity induction activity, and immunity induction activator
US10149905B2 (en) 2014-01-15 2018-12-11 Shin Nippon Biomedical Laboratories, Ltd. Chiral nucleic acid adjuvant having antitumor effect and antitumor agent
US10322173B2 (en) 2014-01-15 2019-06-18 Shin Nippon Biomedical Laboratories, Ltd. Chiral nucleic acid adjuvant having anti-allergic activity, and anti-allergic agent
SG11201605782UA (en) 2014-01-16 2016-08-30 Wave Life Sciences Ltd Chiral design
WO2015142910A1 (en) 2014-03-17 2015-09-24 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic carbocyclic nucleosides and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
US10221416B2 (en) 2014-04-24 2019-03-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomeric compounds comprising alpha-beta-constrained nucleic acid
BR122020024443B1 (en) 2014-05-01 2022-02-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc Compound and pharmaceutical composition for modulating angptl3 expression
ES2812099T3 (en) 2014-05-01 2021-03-16 Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc Compositions and methods for modulating growth hormone receptor expression
HUE052709T2 (en) 2014-05-01 2021-05-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals Inc Conjugates of modified antisense oligonucleotides and their use for modulating pkk expression
EP3811977A1 (en) 2014-05-01 2021-04-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method for synthesis of reactive conjugate clusters
GB201408623D0 (en) 2014-05-15 2014-07-02 Santaris Pharma As Oligomers and oligomer conjugates
US10570169B2 (en) 2014-05-22 2020-02-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
GB201410693D0 (en) 2014-06-16 2014-07-30 Univ Southampton Splicing modulation
WO2016024205A1 (en) 2014-08-15 2016-02-18 Pfizer Inc. Oligomers targeting hexanucleotide repeat expansion in human c9orf72 gene
KR102620328B1 (en) 2014-10-03 2024-01-02 콜드스프링하버러보러토리 Targeted augmentation of nuclear gene output
MX2017004039A (en) 2014-10-10 2017-07-24 Hoffmann La Roche Galnac phosphoramidites, nucleic acid conjugates thereof and their use.
US10364433B2 (en) 2014-11-14 2019-07-30 The Regents Of The University Of California Modulation of AGPAT5 expression
WO2016086104A1 (en) 2014-11-25 2016-06-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of ube3a-ats expression
EP3234131B1 (en) 2014-12-16 2020-04-22 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Chiral toxicity screening method
US9688707B2 (en) 2014-12-30 2017-06-27 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic morpholino compounds and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
US11761951B2 (en) 2015-02-04 2023-09-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Methods of selecting therapeutic molecules
MX2017010066A (en) 2015-02-04 2017-11-01 Hoffmann La Roche Tau antisense oligomers and uses thereof.
EP3722424A1 (en) 2015-04-16 2020-10-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating c9orf72 expression
KR20180055898A (en) 2015-10-08 2018-05-25 아이오니스 파마수티컬즈, 인코포레이티드 Compounds and methods for the modulation of angiotensinogen expression
CN108603230A (en) 2015-10-09 2018-09-28 南安普敦大学 The screening of the adjusting of gene expression and protein expression imbalance
EP3394258B1 (en) 2015-10-22 2021-09-22 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S In vitro toxicity screening assay
WO2017068087A1 (en) 2015-10-22 2017-04-27 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotide detection method
WO2017079291A1 (en) 2015-11-02 2017-05-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating c90rf72
EP3374499A1 (en) 2015-11-12 2018-09-19 H. Hoffnabb-La Roche Ag Methods for determining the efficacy profile of a drug candidate
US11096956B2 (en) 2015-12-14 2021-08-24 Stoke Therapeutics, Inc. Antisense oligomers and uses thereof
CN109312343B (en) 2015-12-14 2022-09-27 冷泉港实验室 Antisense oligomers for the treatment of autosomal dominant mental retardation type 5 and Dravet syndrome
CN114736900B (en) 2016-03-14 2024-05-10 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Oligonucleotides for reducing PD-L1 expression
JP6985288B2 (en) 2016-04-14 2021-12-22 エフ.ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲーF. Hoffmann−La Roche Aktiengesellschaft Trityl-mono-GalNAc compounds and their uses
WO2017216340A1 (en) 2016-06-17 2017-12-21 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag In vitro nephrotoxicity screening assay
JP7012033B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2022-02-10 エフ.ホフマン-ラ ロシュ アーゲー In vitro nephrotoxicity screening assay
MA45496A (en) 2016-06-17 2019-04-24 Hoffmann La Roche NUCLEIC ACID MOLECULES FOR PADD5 OR PAD7 MRNA REDUCTION FOR TREATMENT OF HEPATITIS B INFECTION
CN109477103A (en) 2016-06-22 2019-03-15 ProQR治疗上市公司Ⅱ Single stranded RNA-editor's oligonucleotides
CN109415732B (en) 2016-07-01 2024-01-02 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating HTRA1 expression
JP7033591B2 (en) 2016-11-11 2022-03-10 ロシュ イノベーション センター コペンハーゲン エーエス Capture and detection of therapeutic oligonucleotides
EP3548005A4 (en) 2016-11-29 2020-06-17 Puretech Health LLC Exosomes for delivery of therapeutic agents
EP3330276A1 (en) 2016-11-30 2018-06-06 Universität Bern Novel bicyclic nucleosides and oligomers prepared therefrom
US20190345495A1 (en) 2017-01-13 2019-11-14 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating nfkb2 expression
US20200216845A1 (en) 2017-01-13 2020-07-09 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating rela expression
EP3568478A1 (en) 2017-01-13 2019-11-20 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating rel expression
WO2018130583A1 (en) 2017-01-13 2018-07-19 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating nfkb1 expression
EP3568481A1 (en) 2017-01-13 2019-11-20 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating relb expression
US20190055564A1 (en) 2017-06-01 2019-02-21 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating htra1 expression
WO2019030313A2 (en) 2017-08-11 2019-02-14 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating ube3c expression
WO2019038228A1 (en) 2017-08-22 2019-02-28 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating tom1 expression
PT3673080T (en) 2017-08-25 2023-12-06 Stoke Therapeutics Inc Antisense oligomers for treatment of conditions and diseases
CN111226114A (en) 2017-10-13 2020-06-02 罗氏创新中心哥本哈根有限公司 Method for identifying improved variants of antisense oligonucleotides using a subset of sterically defined oligonucleotides
CA3072314A1 (en) 2017-10-16 2019-04-25 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Nucleic acid molecule for reduction of papd5 and papd7 mrna for treating hepatitis b infection
CN111433361B (en) 2017-12-01 2024-03-29 德克萨斯A&M大学体系 Angel syndrome antisense therapy
EP3724333A2 (en) 2017-12-11 2020-10-21 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating fndc3b expression
WO2019115417A2 (en) 2017-12-12 2019-06-20 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating rb1 expression
KR20200104339A (en) 2017-12-21 2020-09-03 에프. 호프만-라 로슈 아게 Companion diagnostic agent for HTRA1 RNA antagonists
WO2019122279A1 (en) 2017-12-22 2019-06-27 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides comprising a phosphorodithioate internucleoside linkage
WO2019122282A1 (en) 2017-12-22 2019-06-27 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Gapmer oligonucleotides comprising a phosphorodithioate internucleoside linkage
WO2019122277A1 (en) 2017-12-22 2019-06-27 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Novel thiophosphoramidites
WO2019137883A1 (en) 2018-01-10 2019-07-18 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating pias4 expression
US11447775B2 (en) 2018-01-12 2022-09-20 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Antisense oligonucleotides targeting alpha-synuclein and uses thereof
WO2019140236A1 (en) 2018-01-12 2019-07-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Antisense oligonucleotides targeting alpha-synuclein and uses thereof
US20210095275A1 (en) 2018-01-12 2021-04-01 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating gsk3b expression
CR20200301A (en) 2018-01-12 2020-10-26 Roche Innovation Ct Copenhagen As Alpha-synuclein antisense oligonucleotides and uses thereof
WO2019141656A1 (en) 2018-01-17 2019-07-25 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating erc1 expression
EP3740573A1 (en) 2018-01-18 2020-11-25 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting srebp1
WO2019145386A1 (en) 2018-01-26 2019-08-01 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating csnk1d expression
CA3088071A1 (en) 2018-02-09 2019-08-15 Genentech, Inc. Oligonucleotides for modulating tmem106b expression
SG11202007652UA (en) 2018-02-21 2020-09-29 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Camk2d antisense oligonucleotides and uses thereof
CR20200453A (en) 2018-04-05 2021-03-02 Centre Leon Berard Use of fubp1 inhibitors for treating hepatitis b virus infection
BR112020018905A2 (en) 2018-04-13 2021-02-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company phosphorus-based reagents (v), processes for their preparation and their use in the manufacture of defined stereo organophosphate compounds (v)
US12060558B2 (en) 2018-05-04 2024-08-13 Stoke Therapeutics, Inc. Methods and compositions for treatment of cholesteryl ester storage disease
EP3790971A1 (en) 2018-05-08 2021-03-17 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides for modulating myh7 expression
WO2019224172A1 (en) 2018-05-25 2019-11-28 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Novel process for making allofuranose from glucofuranose
US11066669B2 (en) 2018-06-05 2021-07-20 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Oligonucleotides for modulating ATXN2 expression
WO2020007700A1 (en) 2018-07-02 2020-01-09 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting spi1
WO2020007772A1 (en) 2018-07-02 2020-01-09 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting gbp-1
WO2020007702A1 (en) 2018-07-02 2020-01-09 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting bcl2l11
KR102585973B1 (en) 2018-07-03 2023-10-10 에프. 호프만-라 로슈 아게 Oligonucleotides to regulate tau expression
WO2020007889A1 (en) 2018-07-05 2020-01-09 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting stat1
WO2020007826A1 (en) 2018-07-05 2020-01-09 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting mbtps1
WO2020011743A1 (en) 2018-07-09 2020-01-16 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting mafb
WO2020011653A1 (en) 2018-07-09 2020-01-16 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting kynu
WO2020011744A2 (en) 2018-07-11 2020-01-16 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting cers5
WO2020011869A2 (en) 2018-07-11 2020-01-16 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting tlr2
WO2020011745A2 (en) 2018-07-11 2020-01-16 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting cers6
CN112534055A (en) 2018-07-13 2021-03-19 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Oligonucleotides for modulating expression of RTEL1
WO2020025527A1 (en) 2018-07-31 2020-02-06 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Oligonucleotides comprising a phosphorotrithioate internucleoside linkage
ES2924362T3 (en) 2018-07-31 2022-10-06 Roche Innovation Ct Copenhagen As Oligonucleotides comprising a phosphorotrithioate internucleoside linkage
WO2020038976A1 (en) 2018-08-23 2020-02-27 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting usp8
WO2020038973A1 (en) 2018-08-23 2020-02-27 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting sptlc1
CN112585280A (en) 2018-08-23 2021-03-30 罗氏创新中心哥本哈根有限公司 Micro RNA-134 biomarkers
WO2020038971A1 (en) 2018-08-23 2020-02-27 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Antisense oligonucleotides targeting vcan
CN113728102A (en) 2018-08-28 2021-11-30 罗氏创新中心哥本哈根有限公司 Novel antigen engineering using splice-modulating compounds
CN112969709A (en) 2018-11-01 2021-06-15 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Antisense oligonucleotides targeting TIA1
WO2020104492A1 (en) 2018-11-22 2020-05-28 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Pyridinium salts as activators in the synthesis of stereodefined oligonucleotides
WO2020109343A1 (en) 2018-11-29 2020-06-04 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Combination therapy for treatment of macular degeneration
WO2020109344A1 (en) 2018-11-29 2020-06-04 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Occular administration device for antisense oligonucleotides
WO2020136125A2 (en) 2018-12-21 2020-07-02 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Antisense oligonucleotides targeting card9
JP2022518500A (en) 2019-01-25 2022-03-15 エフ.ホフマン-ラ ロシュ アーゲー Lipid vesicles for oral drug delivery
MX2021009950A (en) 2019-02-20 2021-09-21 Roche Innovation Ct Copenhagen As Phosphonoacetate gapmer oligonucleotides.
AU2020225336A1 (en) 2019-02-20 2021-08-19 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Novel phosphoramidites
CN113474633A (en) 2019-02-26 2021-10-01 罗氏创新中心哥本哈根有限公司 Process for preparing oligonucleotide
US20220184216A1 (en) 2019-03-05 2022-06-16 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Intracellular targeting of molecules
AU2020241903A1 (en) 2019-03-21 2021-10-14 Lonza Sales Ag Extracellular vesicle conjugates and uses thereof
AU2020254929A1 (en) 2019-04-02 2021-11-11 Proqr Therapeutics Ii B.V. Antisense oligonucleotides for immunotherapy
EP3947680A2 (en) 2019-04-03 2022-02-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Angptl2 antisense oligonucleotides and uses thereof
WO2020201339A1 (en) 2019-04-04 2020-10-08 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Oligonucleotides for modulating atxn2 expression
US11286485B2 (en) 2019-04-04 2022-03-29 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Oligonucleotides for modulating ATXN2 expression
US20220194976A1 (en) 2019-04-16 2022-06-23 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Novel Process for Preparing Nucleotide P(V) Monomers
EP3962918A1 (en) 2019-04-30 2022-03-09 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Novel process for preparing rhenium chelated mag3 oligonucleotides
EP3980539A1 (en) 2019-06-06 2022-04-13 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Antisense oligonucleotides targeting atxn3
CA3147365A1 (en) 2019-08-14 2021-02-18 Joanne LIM Extracellular vesicle-nlrp3 antagonist
CN114641570A (en) 2019-08-14 2022-06-17 科迪亚克生物科学公司 Extracellular vesicles with KRAS-targeted antisense oligonucleotides
BR112022002691A2 (en) 2019-08-14 2022-08-23 Codiak Biosciences Inc EXTRACELLULAR ASO VESICLE CONSTRUCTS AIMING STAT6
CA3147369A1 (en) 2019-08-14 2021-02-18 Dalia BURZYN Extracellular vesicle-aso constructs targeting cebp/beta
EP4013875A1 (en) 2019-08-14 2022-06-22 Codiak BioSciences, Inc. Extracellular vesicles with stat3-antisense oligonucleotides
US20220354963A1 (en) 2019-08-14 2022-11-10 Codiak Biosciences, Inc. Extracellular vesicle linked to molecules and uses thereof
WO2021062058A1 (en) 2019-09-25 2021-04-01 Codiak Biosciences, Inc. Sting agonist comprising exosomes for treating neuroimmunological disorders
WO2021122993A1 (en) 2019-12-19 2021-06-24 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Use of saraf inhibitors for treating hepatitis b virus infection
CN115516091A (en) 2019-12-19 2022-12-23 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Use of COPS3 inhibitors for the treatment of hepatitis b virus infection
EP4077668A1 (en) 2019-12-19 2022-10-26 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Use of scamp3 inhibitors for treating hepatitis b virus infection
EP4077667A1 (en) 2019-12-19 2022-10-26 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Use of sept9 inhibitors for treating hepatitis b virus infection
EP4077669A1 (en) 2019-12-19 2022-10-26 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Use of sbds inhibitors for treating hepatitis b virus infection
AR120817A1 (en) 2019-12-20 2022-03-23 Hoffmann La Roche ENHANCED OLIGONUCLEOTIDES TO INHIBIT SCN9A EXPRESSION
EP4081639A1 (en) 2019-12-24 2022-11-02 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Pharmaceutical combination of a therapeutic oligonucleotide targeting hbv and a tlr7 agonist for treatment of hbv
JP2023509872A (en) 2019-12-24 2023-03-10 エフ. ホフマン-ラ ロシュ アーゲー Pharmaceutical combinations of antiviral agents targeting HBV and/or immunomodulatory agents for the treatment of HBV
WO2021158810A1 (en) 2020-02-05 2021-08-12 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Oligonucleotides for splice modulation of camk2d
JPWO2021166981A1 (en) * 2020-02-18 2021-08-26
CN115176010A (en) 2020-02-28 2022-10-11 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Oligonucleotides for modulating CD73 exon 7 splicing
WO2021184020A1 (en) 2020-03-13 2021-09-16 Codiak Biosciences, Inc. Methods of treating neuroinflammation
WO2021184021A1 (en) 2020-03-13 2021-09-16 Codiak Biosciences, Inc. Extracellular vesicle-aso constructs targeting pmp22
JP2023525770A (en) 2020-05-11 2023-06-19 ジェネンテック, インコーポレイテッド COMPLEMENT C4 INHIBITORS AND RELATED COMPOSITIONS FOR TREATMENT OF NEUROLOGICAL DISEASES, AND SYSTEMS AND METHODS USING THE SAME
JP2023527693A (en) 2020-05-11 2023-06-30 ジェネンテック, インコーポレイテッド Complement Component C1R Inhibitors and Related Compositions, Systems, and Methods of Using The Same for Treating Neurological Disorders
WO2021231211A1 (en) 2020-05-11 2021-11-18 Genentech, Inc. Complement component c1s inhibitors for treating a neurological disease, and related compositions, systems and methods of using same
IL298063A (en) 2020-05-11 2023-01-01 Stoke Therapeutics Inc Opa1 antisense oligomers for treatment of conditions and diseases
WO2021229036A1 (en) 2020-05-13 2021-11-18 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Oligonucleotide agonists targeting progranulin
WO2021233551A1 (en) 2020-05-22 2021-11-25 F.Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Oligonucleotides for splice modulation of card9
CN115702243A (en) 2020-06-09 2023-02-14 罗氏创新中心哥本哈根有限公司 Guanosine analogs for therapeutic polynucleotides
AR122731A1 (en) 2020-06-26 2022-10-05 Hoffmann La Roche IMPROVED OLIGONUCLEOTIDES TO MODULATE FUBP1 EXPRESSION
TW202219273A (en) 2020-07-23 2022-05-16 瑞士商赫孚孟拉羅股份公司 Oligonucleotides targeting rna binding protein sites
WO2022018155A1 (en) 2020-07-23 2022-01-27 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Lna oligonucleotides for splice modulation of stmn2
WO2022038211A2 (en) 2020-08-21 2022-02-24 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Use of a1cf inhibitors for treating hepatitis b virus infection
WO2022076596A1 (en) 2020-10-06 2022-04-14 Codiak Biosciences, Inc. Extracellular vesicle-aso constructs targeting stat6
US20240002853A1 (en) 2020-11-23 2024-01-04 Alpha Anomeric Sas Nucleic acid duplexes
WO2022117747A2 (en) 2020-12-03 2022-06-09 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Antisense oligonucleotides targeting atxn3
AR124229A1 (en) 2020-12-03 2023-03-01 Hoffmann La Roche ANTISENSE OLIGONUCLOTIDES ACTING ON ATXN3
CN116568696A (en) 2020-12-08 2023-08-08 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Novel synthesis of phosphorodithioate oligonucleotides
US12104153B2 (en) 2020-12-18 2024-10-01 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide for targeting progranulin
CN116670282A (en) 2020-12-22 2023-08-29 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 XBP 1-targeting oligonucleotides
TW202246500A (en) 2021-02-02 2022-12-01 瑞士商赫孚孟拉羅股份公司 Enhanced oligonucleotides for inhibiting rtel1 expression
WO2022178149A2 (en) 2021-02-17 2022-08-25 Codiak Biosciences, Inc. Extracellular vesicle-nlrp3 antagonist
CA3207947A1 (en) 2021-02-17 2022-08-25 Aaron Noyes Extracellular vesicle linked to a biologically active molecule via an optimized linker and an anchoring moiety
US20240141340A1 (en) 2021-03-05 2024-05-02 Proqr Therapeutics Ii B.V. Antisense oligonucleotides for use in the treatment of corneal dystrophies
WO2022212884A1 (en) 2021-04-01 2022-10-06 Codiak Biosciences, Inc. Extracellular vesicle compositions
CA3222546A1 (en) 2021-06-08 2022-12-15 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Oligonucleotide progranulin agonists
WO2023052317A1 (en) 2021-09-29 2023-04-06 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Rna editing
WO2023078883A1 (en) 2021-11-03 2023-05-11 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Oligonucleotides for modulating apolipoprotein e4 expression
WO2023083906A2 (en) 2021-11-11 2023-05-19 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Pharmaceutical combinations for treatment of hbv
WO2023104693A1 (en) 2021-12-07 2023-06-15 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Antisense oligonucleotides targeting actl6b
EP4448106A1 (en) 2021-12-17 2024-10-23 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Combination of oligonucleotides for modulating rtel1 and fubp1
EP4448763A1 (en) 2021-12-17 2024-10-23 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Oligonucleotide gba agonists
CN118434860A (en) 2021-12-20 2024-08-02 豪夫迈·罗氏有限公司 Threose nucleic acid antisense oligonucleotide and method thereof
AU2022421244A1 (en) 2021-12-22 2024-07-11 Camp4 Therapeutics Corporation Modulation of gene transcription using antisense oligonucleotides targeting regulatory rnas
CN118613268A (en) 2022-01-20 2024-09-06 基因泰克公司 Antisense oligonucleotides for modulating TMEM106B expression
US20240167040A1 (en) 2022-02-21 2024-05-23 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Antisense oligonucleotide
TW202400787A (en) 2022-03-16 2024-01-01 美商安彼瑞可股份有限公司 Galnac compositions for improving sirna bioavailability
WO2023217890A1 (en) 2022-05-10 2023-11-16 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Antisense oligonucleotides targeting cfp-elk1 intergene region
TW202409276A (en) 2022-05-18 2024-03-01 瑞士商赫孚孟拉羅股份公司 Improved oligonucleotides targeting rna binding protein sites
WO2023240277A2 (en) 2022-06-10 2023-12-14 Camp4 Therapeutics Corporation Methods of modulating progranulin expression using antisense oligonucleotides targeting regulatory rnas
WO2023242324A1 (en) 2022-06-17 2023-12-21 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Antisense oligonucleotides for targeting progranulin
EP4332221A1 (en) 2022-08-29 2024-03-06 Roche Innovation Center Copenhagen A/S Threose nucleic acid antisense oligonucleotides and methods thereof
TW202421206A (en) 2022-09-06 2024-06-01 瑞士商赫孚孟拉羅股份公司 Double-stranded rna molecule for administration to the eye
WO2024098061A2 (en) 2022-11-04 2024-05-10 Genkardia Inc. Oligonucleotide-based therapeutics targeting cyclin d2 for the treatment of heart failure
WO2024119145A1 (en) 2022-12-01 2024-06-06 Camp4 Therapeutics Corporation Modulation of syngap1 gene transcription using antisense oligonucleotides targeting regulatory rnas
WO2024126654A1 (en) 2022-12-14 2024-06-20 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Antisense oligonucleotides targeting actl6b

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120172414A1 (en) * 2009-08-06 2012-07-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs

Family Cites Families (136)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3687808A (en) 1969-08-14 1972-08-29 Univ Leland Stanford Junior Synthetic polynucleotides
US5132418A (en) 1980-02-29 1992-07-21 University Patents, Inc. Process for preparing polynucleotides
US4500707A (en) 1980-02-29 1985-02-19 University Patents, Inc. Nucleosides useful in the preparation of polynucleotides
US4458066A (en) 1980-02-29 1984-07-03 University Patents, Inc. Process for preparing polynucleotides
US4469863A (en) 1980-11-12 1984-09-04 Ts O Paul O P Nonionic nucleic acid alkyl and aryl phosphonates and processes for manufacture and use thereof
US4415732A (en) 1981-03-27 1983-11-15 University Patents, Inc. Phosphoramidite compounds and processes
US4973679A (en) 1981-03-27 1990-11-27 University Patents, Inc. Process for oligonucleo tide synthesis using phosphormidite intermediates
US4668777A (en) 1981-03-27 1987-05-26 University Patents, Inc. Phosphoramidite nucleoside compounds
US5023243A (en) 1981-10-23 1991-06-11 Molecular Biosystems, Inc. Oligonucleotide therapeutic agent and method of making same
US4476301A (en) 1982-04-29 1984-10-09 Centre National De La Recherche Scientifique Oligonucleotides, a process for preparing the same and their application as mediators of the action of interferon
USRE34069E (en) 1983-08-18 1992-09-15 Biosyntech Gmbh Process for the preparation of oligonucleotides
DE3329892A1 (en) 1983-08-18 1985-03-07 Köster, Hubert, Prof. Dr., 2000 Hamburg METHOD FOR PRODUCING OLIGONUCLEOTIDES
US5118800A (en) 1983-12-20 1992-06-02 California Institute Of Technology Oligonucleotides possessing a primary amino group in the terminal nucleotide
USRE34036E (en) 1984-06-06 1992-08-18 National Research Development Corporation Data transmission using a transparent tone-in band system
US5550111A (en) 1984-07-11 1996-08-27 Temple University-Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Dual action 2',5'-oligoadenylate antiviral derivatives and uses thereof
FR2567892B1 (en) 1984-07-19 1989-02-17 Centre Nat Rech Scient NOVEL OLIGONUCLEOTIDES, THEIR PREPARATION PROCESS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS AS MEDIATORS IN DEVELOPING THE EFFECTS OF INTERFERONS
US5367066A (en) 1984-10-16 1994-11-22 Chiron Corporation Oligonucleotides with selectably cleavable and/or abasic sites
FR2575751B1 (en) 1985-01-08 1987-04-03 Pasteur Institut NOVEL ADENOSINE DERIVATIVE NUCLEOSIDES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR BIOLOGICAL APPLICATIONS
US5235033A (en) 1985-03-15 1993-08-10 Anti-Gene Development Group Alpha-morpholino ribonucleoside derivatives and polymers thereof
US5405938A (en) 1989-12-20 1995-04-11 Anti-Gene Development Group Sequence-specific binding polymers for duplex nucleic acids
US5166315A (en) 1989-12-20 1992-11-24 Anti-Gene Development Group Sequence-specific binding polymers for duplex nucleic acids
US5034506A (en) 1985-03-15 1991-07-23 Anti-Gene Development Group Uncharged morpholino-based polymers having achiral intersubunit linkages
US5185444A (en) 1985-03-15 1993-02-09 Anti-Gene Deveopment Group Uncharged morpolino-based polymers having phosphorous containing chiral intersubunit linkages
EP0260032B1 (en) 1986-09-08 1994-01-26 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Compounds for the cleavage at a specific position of RNA, oligomers employed for the formation of said compounds, and starting materials for the synthesis of said oligomers
US5264423A (en) 1987-03-25 1993-11-23 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Inhibitors for replication of retroviruses and for the expression of oncogene products
US5276019A (en) 1987-03-25 1994-01-04 The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health And Human Services Inhibitors for replication of retroviruses and for the expression of oncogene products
CA1340032C (en) 1987-06-24 1998-09-08 Jim Haralambidis Lucleoside derivatives
US5188897A (en) 1987-10-22 1993-02-23 Temple University Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Encapsulated 2',5'-phosphorothioate oligoadenylates
US4924624A (en) 1987-10-22 1990-05-15 Temple University-Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education 2,',5'-phosphorothioate oligoadenylates and plant antiviral uses thereof
US5403711A (en) 1987-11-30 1995-04-04 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Nucleic acid hybridization and amplification method for detection of specific sequences in which a complementary labeled nucleic acid probe is cleaved
EP0348458B1 (en) 1987-11-30 1997-04-09 University Of Iowa Research Foundation Dna molecules stabilized by modifications of the 3'-terminal phosphodiester linkage and their use as nucleic acid probes and as therapeutic agents to block the expression of specifically targeted genes
WO1989009221A1 (en) 1988-03-25 1989-10-05 University Of Virginia Alumni Patents Foundation Oligonucleotide n-alkylphosphoramidates
US5278302A (en) 1988-05-26 1994-01-11 University Patents, Inc. Polynucleotide phosphorodithioates
US5216141A (en) 1988-06-06 1993-06-01 Benner Steven A Oligonucleotide analogs containing sulfur linkages
US5175273A (en) 1988-07-01 1992-12-29 Genentech, Inc. Nucleic acid intercalating agents
US5194599A (en) 1988-09-23 1993-03-16 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Hydrogen phosphonodithioate compositions
US5256775A (en) 1989-06-05 1993-10-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Exonuclease-resistant oligonucleotides
US5134066A (en) 1989-08-29 1992-07-28 Monsanto Company Improved probes using nucleosides containing 3-dezauracil analogs
US5591722A (en) 1989-09-15 1997-01-07 Southern Research Institute 2'-deoxy-4'-thioribonucleosides and their antiviral activity
US5721218A (en) 1989-10-23 1998-02-24 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Oligonucleotides with inverted polarity
US5399676A (en) 1989-10-23 1995-03-21 Gilead Sciences Oligonucleotides with inverted polarity
US5264564A (en) 1989-10-24 1993-11-23 Gilead Sciences Oligonucleotide analogs with novel linkages
DE69033495T2 (en) 1989-10-24 2000-07-20 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2'-MODIFIED NUCLEOTIDES
US5264562A (en) 1989-10-24 1993-11-23 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Oligonucleotide analogs with novel linkages
US5177198A (en) 1989-11-30 1993-01-05 University Of N.C. At Chapel Hill Process for preparing oligoribonucleoside and oligodeoxyribonucleoside boranophosphates
US5130302A (en) 1989-12-20 1992-07-14 Boron Bilogicals, Inc. Boronated nucleoside, nucleotide and oligonucleotide compounds, compositions and methods for using same
US5670633A (en) 1990-01-11 1997-09-23 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Sugar modified oligonucleotides that detect and modulate gene expression
US5587361A (en) 1991-10-15 1996-12-24 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleotides having phosphorothioate linkages of high chiral purity
US5681941A (en) 1990-01-11 1997-10-28 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted purines and oligonucleotide cross-linking
US5623065A (en) 1990-08-13 1997-04-22 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Gapped 2' modified oligonucleotides
US5459255A (en) 1990-01-11 1995-10-17 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. N-2 substituted purines
US5646265A (en) 1990-01-11 1997-07-08 Isis Pharmceuticals, Inc. Process for the preparation of 2'-O-alkyl purine phosphoramidites
US5587470A (en) 1990-01-11 1996-12-24 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3-deazapurines
US5149797A (en) 1990-02-15 1992-09-22 The Worcester Foundation For Experimental Biology Method of site-specific alteration of rna and production of encoded polypeptides
US5220007A (en) 1990-02-15 1993-06-15 The Worcester Foundation For Experimental Biology Method of site-specific alteration of RNA and production of encoded polypeptides
US5321131A (en) 1990-03-08 1994-06-14 Hybridon, Inc. Site-specific functionalization of oligodeoxynucleotides for non-radioactive labelling
US5470967A (en) 1990-04-10 1995-11-28 The Dupont Merck Pharmaceutical Company Oligonucleotide analogs with sulfamate linkages
GB9009980D0 (en) 1990-05-03 1990-06-27 Amersham Int Plc Phosphoramidite derivatives,their preparation and the use thereof in the incorporation of reporter groups on synthetic oligonucleotides
EP0455905B1 (en) 1990-05-11 1998-06-17 Microprobe Corporation Dipsticks for nucleic acid hybridization assays and methods for covalently immobilizing oligonucleotides
US5618704A (en) 1990-07-27 1997-04-08 Isis Pharmacueticals, Inc. Backbone-modified oligonucleotide analogs and preparation thereof through radical coupling
US5378825A (en) 1990-07-27 1995-01-03 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs
US5602240A (en) 1990-07-27 1997-02-11 Ciba Geigy Ag. Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs
US5489677A (en) 1990-07-27 1996-02-06 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligonucleoside linkages containing adjacent oxygen and nitrogen atoms
BR9106702A (en) 1990-07-27 1993-06-08 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc ANALOG OF OLIGONUCLEOTIDEOS AND PROCESSES TO MODULATE THE PRODUCTION OF A PROTEIN BY AN ORGANISM AND TO TREAT AN ORGANISM
US5223618A (en) 1990-08-13 1993-06-29 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analog compounds
US5623070A (en) 1990-07-27 1997-04-22 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heteroatomic oligonucleoside linkages
US5541307A (en) 1990-07-27 1996-07-30 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs and solid phase synthesis thereof
US5610289A (en) 1990-07-27 1997-03-11 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogues
US5608046A (en) 1990-07-27 1997-03-04 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated 4'-desmethyl nucleoside analog compounds
US5677437A (en) 1990-07-27 1997-10-14 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heteroatomic oligonucleoside linkages
US5386023A (en) 1990-07-27 1995-01-31 Isis Pharmaceuticals Backbone modified oligonucleotide analogs and preparation thereof through reductive coupling
ES2083593T3 (en) 1990-08-03 1996-04-16 Sterling Winthrop Inc COMPOUNDS AND METHODS TO INHIBIT THE EXPRESSION OF GENES.
US5177196A (en) 1990-08-16 1993-01-05 Microprobe Corporation Oligo (α-arabinofuranosyl nucleotides) and α-arabinofuranosyl precursors thereof
US5214134A (en) 1990-09-12 1993-05-25 Sterling Winthrop Inc. Process of linking nucleosides with a siloxane bridge
US5561225A (en) 1990-09-19 1996-10-01 Southern Research Institute Polynucleotide analogs containing sulfonate and sulfonamide internucleoside linkages
EP0549686A4 (en) 1990-09-20 1995-01-18 Gilead Sciences Inc Modified internucleoside linkages
US5432272A (en) 1990-10-09 1995-07-11 Benner; Steven A. Method for incorporating into a DNA or RNA oligonucleotide using nucleotides bearing heterocyclic bases
US5672697A (en) 1991-02-08 1997-09-30 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Nucleoside 5'-methylene phosphonates
US5571799A (en) 1991-08-12 1996-11-05 Basco, Ltd. (2'-5') oligoadenylate analogues useful as inhibitors of host-v5.-graft response
DE59208572D1 (en) 1991-10-17 1997-07-10 Ciba Geigy Ag Bicyclic nucleosides, oligonucleotides, processes for their preparation and intermediates
US5594121A (en) 1991-11-07 1997-01-14 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Enhanced triple-helix and double-helix formation with oligomers containing modified purines
DE637965T1 (en) 1991-11-26 1995-12-14 Gilead Sciences Inc INCREASED FORMATION OF TRIPLE AND DOUBLE HELICOS FROM OLIGOMERS WITH MODIFIED PYRIMIDINES.
TW393513B (en) 1991-11-26 2000-06-11 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc Enhanced triple-helix and double-helix formation with oligomers containing modified pyrimidines
US5484908A (en) 1991-11-26 1996-01-16 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Oligonucleotides containing 5-propynyl pyrimidines
US5792608A (en) 1991-12-12 1998-08-11 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Nuclease stable and binding competent oligomers and methods for their use
US5359044A (en) 1991-12-13 1994-10-25 Isis Pharmaceuticals Cyclobutyl oligonucleotide surrogates
US5700922A (en) 1991-12-24 1997-12-23 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. PNA-DNA-PNA chimeric macromolecules
FR2687679B1 (en) 1992-02-05 1994-10-28 Centre Nat Rech Scient OLIGOTHIONUCLEOTIDES.
US5633360A (en) 1992-04-14 1997-05-27 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Oligonucleotide analogs capable of passive cell membrane permeation
US5434257A (en) 1992-06-01 1995-07-18 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Binding compentent oligomers containing unsaturated 3',5' and 2',5' linkages
EP0577558A2 (en) 1992-07-01 1994-01-05 Ciba-Geigy Ag Carbocyclic nucleosides having bicyclic rings, oligonucleotides therefrom, process for their preparation, their use and intermediates
US5652355A (en) 1992-07-23 1997-07-29 Worcester Foundation For Experimental Biology Hybrid oligonucleotide phosphorothioates
ATE162198T1 (en) 1992-07-27 1998-01-15 Hybridon Inc OLIGONUCLEOTIDE ALKYLPHOSPHONOTHIATE
WO1994017093A1 (en) 1993-01-25 1994-08-04 Hybridon, Inc. Oligonucleotide alkylphosphonates and alkylphosphonothioates
US5476925A (en) 1993-02-01 1995-12-19 Northwestern University Oligodeoxyribonucleotides including 3'-aminonucleoside-phosphoramidate linkages and terminal 3'-amino groups
GB9304620D0 (en) 1993-03-06 1993-04-21 Ciba Geigy Ag Compounds
GB9304618D0 (en) 1993-03-06 1993-04-21 Ciba Geigy Ag Chemical compounds
DE69404289T2 (en) 1993-03-30 1998-02-19 Sanofi Sa ACYCLIC NUCLEOSIDE ANALOGS AND THEIR OLIGONUCLEOTIDE SEQUENCES
CA2159629A1 (en) 1993-03-31 1994-10-13 Sanofi Oligonucleotides with amide linkages replacing phosphodiester linkages
US5502177A (en) 1993-09-17 1996-03-26 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Pyrimidine derivatives for labeled binding partners
US5457187A (en) 1993-12-08 1995-10-10 Board Of Regents University Of Nebraska Oligonucleotides containing 5-fluorouracil
PT733059E (en) 1993-12-09 2001-03-30 Univ Jefferson COMPOUNDS AND METHODS FOR LOCAL MUTACOES IN EUCARIOTIC CELLS
US5446137B1 (en) 1993-12-09 1998-10-06 Behringwerke Ag Oligonucleotides containing 4'-substituted nucleotides
US5519134A (en) 1994-01-11 1996-05-21 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyrrolidine-containing monomers and oligomers
US5596091A (en) 1994-03-18 1997-01-21 The Regents Of The University Of California Antisense oligonucleotides comprising 5-aminoalkyl pyrimidine nucleotides
US5627053A (en) 1994-03-29 1997-05-06 Ribozyme Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2'deoxy-2'-alkylnucleotide containing nucleic acid
US5625050A (en) 1994-03-31 1997-04-29 Amgen Inc. Modified oligonucleotides and intermediates useful in nucleic acid therapeutics
US5646269A (en) 1994-04-28 1997-07-08 Gilead Sciences, Inc. Method for oligonucleotide analog synthesis
US5525711A (en) 1994-05-18 1996-06-11 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services Pteridine nucleotide analogs as fluorescent DNA probes
US5597909A (en) 1994-08-25 1997-01-28 Chiron Corporation Polynucleotide reagents containing modified deoxyribose moieties, and associated methods of synthesis and use
US5652356A (en) 1995-08-17 1997-07-29 Hybridon, Inc. Inverted chimeric and hybrid oligonucleotides
JP3756313B2 (en) 1997-03-07 2006-03-15 武 今西 Novel bicyclonucleosides and oligonucleotide analogues
US6770748B2 (en) 1997-03-07 2004-08-03 Takeshi Imanishi Bicyclonucleoside and oligonucleotide analogue
US6794499B2 (en) 1997-09-12 2004-09-21 Exiqon A/S Oligonucleotide analogues
AU9063398A (en) 1997-09-12 1999-04-05 Exiqon A/S Oligonucleotide analogues
US6043352A (en) 1998-08-07 2000-03-28 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 2'-O-Dimethylaminoethyloxyethyl-modified oligonucleotides
ID30093A (en) 1999-02-12 2001-11-01 Sankyo Co NEW ANALOGUE OF NUCLEOSIDE AND OLIGONUKLEOTIDE
US7084125B2 (en) 1999-03-18 2006-08-01 Exiqon A/S Xylo-LNA analogues
KR100782896B1 (en) 1999-05-04 2007-12-06 엑시콘 에이/에스 L-Ribo-LNA analogues
JP4151751B2 (en) 1999-07-22 2008-09-17 第一三共株式会社 New bicyclonucleoside analogues
EP1314734A1 (en) 2000-08-29 2003-05-28 Takeshi Imanishi Novel nucleoside analogs and oligonucleotide derivatives containing these analogs
US6426220B1 (en) 2000-10-30 2002-07-30 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Antisense modulation of calreticulin expression
AU2002334307A1 (en) 2001-09-04 2003-03-18 Exiqon A/S Novel lna compositions and uses thereof
US7569575B2 (en) 2002-05-08 2009-08-04 Santaris Pharma A/S Synthesis of locked nucleic acid derivatives
US20040219565A1 (en) 2002-10-21 2004-11-04 Sakari Kauppinen Oligonucleotides useful for detecting and analyzing nucleic acids of interest
EP1562971B1 (en) 2002-11-05 2014-02-12 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Polycyclic sugar surrogate-containing oligomeric compounds and compositions for use in gene modulation
DK1661905T3 (en) 2003-08-28 2012-07-23 Takeshi Imanishi Novel N-O cross-linking synthetic nucleic acids
CA2538252C (en) 2003-09-18 2014-02-25 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 4'-thionucleosides and oligomeric compounds
AU2005252662B2 (en) 2004-06-03 2011-08-18 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Double strand compositions comprising differentially modified strands for use in gene modulation
KR101304071B1 (en) 2006-01-27 2013-09-06 아이시스 파마수티컬즈 인코포레이티드 6-modified bicyclic nucleic acid analogs
AU2007249349B2 (en) * 2006-05-11 2012-03-08 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 5'-Modified bicyclic nucleic acid analogs
US20100190837A1 (en) 2007-02-15 2010-07-29 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 5'-Substituted-2-F' Modified Nucleosides and Oligomeric Compounds Prepared Therefrom
US8278425B2 (en) 2007-05-30 2012-10-02 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. N-substituted-aminomethylene bridged bicyclic nucleic acid analogs
US8278426B2 (en) 2007-06-08 2012-10-02 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Carbocyclic bicyclic nucleic acid analogs
DK2176280T4 (en) 2007-07-05 2015-07-20 Isis Pharmaceuticals Inc 6-Disubstituerede bicykliske nukleinsyreanaloge
US8546556B2 (en) * 2007-11-21 2013-10-01 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc Carbocyclic alpha-L-bicyclic nucleic acid analogs

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20120172414A1 (en) * 2009-08-06 2012-07-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Prakash, T. P., Chemistry & Biodiversity, "An Overview of Sugar-Modified Oligonucleotides for Antisense Therapeutics", 2011, vol. 8, pp.1616-1641 *

Cited By (124)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11376273B2 (en) 2008-10-15 2022-07-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of factor 11 expression
US10772906B2 (en) 2008-10-15 2020-09-15 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of Factor 11 expression
US9765338B2 (en) 2010-07-19 2017-09-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of dystrophia myotonica-protein kinase (DMPK) expression
US10815480B2 (en) 2010-11-17 2020-10-27 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of alpha synuclein expression
US12043831B2 (en) 2010-11-17 2024-07-23 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of alpha synuclein expression
US11781135B2 (en) 2012-03-30 2023-10-10 Washington University Methods for treating Alzheimer's disease
US9932580B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2018-04-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating HBV expression
US10683499B2 (en) 2013-05-01 2020-06-16 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating TTR expression
US10077236B2 (en) 2013-07-15 2018-09-18 The Regents Of The University Of California Azacyclic constrained analogs of FTY720
US12091662B2 (en) 2013-07-19 2024-09-17 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating tau expression
US11591595B2 (en) 2013-07-19 2023-02-28 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating Tau expression
US10793856B2 (en) 2013-07-19 2020-10-06 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating Tau expression
US10954519B2 (en) 2013-08-09 2021-03-23 lonis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of dystrophia myotonica-protein kinase (DMPK) expression
US11981897B2 (en) 2013-08-09 2024-05-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of dystrophia myotonica-protein kinase (DMPK) expression
US11162096B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2021-11-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc Methods for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript
US11193128B2 (en) 2013-10-14 2021-12-07 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript
US11111494B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2021-09-07 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating Ataxin 2 expression
US11834660B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2023-12-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating Ataxin 2 expression
US10308934B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2019-06-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating Ataxin 2 expression
US10006027B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2018-06-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for modulating Ataxin 2 expression
US10533178B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2020-01-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for modulating Ataxin 2 expression
US10385341B2 (en) 2014-04-01 2019-08-20 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating SOD-1 expression
US10968453B2 (en) 2014-04-01 2021-04-06 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating SOD-1 expression
US10669546B2 (en) 2014-04-01 2020-06-02 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions for modulating SOD-1 expression
US11732265B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2023-08-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor B expression
US10280423B2 (en) 2014-05-01 2019-05-07 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating complement factor B expression
US12013403B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2024-06-18 Biogen Ma Inc. Compositions and methods for detection of SMN protein in a subject and treatment of a subject
US10793855B2 (en) 2015-01-06 2020-10-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript
US10538763B2 (en) 2015-01-16 2020-01-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of DUX4
US11129844B2 (en) 2015-03-03 2021-09-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating MECP2 expression
US10407678B2 (en) 2015-04-16 2019-09-10 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions for modulating expression of C9ORF72 antisense transcript
US11479530B2 (en) 2015-09-24 2022-10-25 The Regents Of The University Of California Synthetic sphingolipid-like molecules, drugs, methods of their synthesis and methods of treatment
US10995068B2 (en) 2015-09-24 2021-05-04 The Regents Of The University Of California Synthetic sphingolipid-like molecules, drugs, methods of their synthesis and methods of treatment
US11999693B2 (en) 2015-09-24 2024-06-04 The Regents Of The University Of California Synthetic sphingolipid-like molecules, drugs, methods of their synthesis and methods of treatment
EP4285912A2 (en) 2015-09-25 2023-12-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating ataxin 3 expression
US11293025B2 (en) 2015-09-25 2022-04-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating Ataxin 3 expression
US10533175B2 (en) 2015-09-25 2020-01-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compositions and methods for modulating Ataxin 3 expression
WO2017079745A1 (en) 2015-11-06 2017-05-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds for use in therapy
EP4119569A1 (en) 2015-11-06 2023-01-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds for use in therapy
US11058709B1 (en) 2015-12-04 2021-07-13 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of treating breast cancer
US10907160B2 (en) 2016-01-05 2021-02-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for reducing LRRK2 expression
WO2017120365A1 (en) 2016-01-05 2017-07-13 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for reducing lrrk2 expression
US11530411B2 (en) 2016-01-05 2022-12-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for reducing LRRK2 expression
US11136577B2 (en) 2016-03-09 2021-10-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for inhibiting PMP22 expression
US11959080B2 (en) 2016-03-09 2024-04-16 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods and compositions for inhibiting PMP22 expression
WO2017161172A1 (en) 2016-03-16 2017-09-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of modulating keap1
US10961271B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2021-03-30 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of modulating KEAP1
US10577607B2 (en) 2016-03-16 2020-03-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of DYRK1B expression
WO2017180835A1 (en) 2016-04-13 2017-10-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for reducing c9orf72 expression
WO2017192820A1 (en) 2016-05-06 2017-11-09 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glp-1 receptor ligand moiety conjugated oligonucleotides and uses thereof
US11713462B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2023-08-01 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of GYS1 expression
US11236339B2 (en) 2016-06-17 2022-02-01 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of GYS1 expression
EP4206213A1 (en) 2016-07-15 2023-07-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of smn2
WO2018014041A2 (en) 2016-07-15 2018-01-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulation of smn2
US10407680B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2019-09-10 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing Tau expression
US11053498B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2021-07-06 Biogen Ma Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing Tau expression
WO2018064593A1 (en) 2016-09-29 2018-04-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing tau expression
EP4335923A2 (en) 2016-09-29 2024-03-13 Biogen MA Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing tau expression
US11400161B2 (en) 2016-10-06 2022-08-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Method of conjugating oligomeric compounds
US11583548B2 (en) 2016-11-10 2023-02-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing ATXN3 expression
WO2018089805A1 (en) 2016-11-10 2018-05-17 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing atxn3 expression
US11033570B2 (en) 2016-12-02 2021-06-15 Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Modulation of Lnc05 expression
EP4309732A2 (en) 2017-03-24 2024-01-24 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pcsk9 expression
US11197884B2 (en) 2017-08-18 2021-12-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of the notch signaling pathway for treatment of respiratory disorders
US10517889B2 (en) 2017-09-08 2019-12-31 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of SMAD7 expression
US11230712B2 (en) 2017-11-09 2022-01-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing SNCA expression
EP4434585A2 (en) 2017-11-09 2024-09-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing snca expression
WO2019118916A1 (en) 2017-12-14 2019-06-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
EP4257691A2 (en) 2017-12-14 2023-10-11 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
US11725208B2 (en) 2017-12-14 2023-08-15 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Conjugated antisense compounds and their use
US11459564B2 (en) 2017-12-21 2022-10-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulation of frataxin expression
US10865414B2 (en) 2018-01-15 2020-12-15 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of DNM2 expression
WO2019140452A1 (en) 2018-01-15 2019-07-18 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of dnm2 expression
US11332733B2 (en) 2018-02-12 2022-05-17 lonis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified compounds and uses thereof
US11149264B2 (en) 2018-02-12 2021-10-19 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modified compounds and uses thereof
US11241451B2 (en) 2018-03-02 2022-02-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of IRF4 expression
US11732260B2 (en) 2018-03-02 2023-08-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for the modulation of amyloid-β precursor protein
US12042510B2 (en) 2018-03-02 2024-07-23 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of IRF4 expression
US11661601B2 (en) 2018-03-22 2023-05-30 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for modulating FMR1 expression
US11365416B2 (en) 2018-04-11 2022-06-21 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of EZH2 expression
WO2019217527A1 (en) 2018-05-09 2019-11-14 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing fxi expression
US11434488B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2022-09-06 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing ATXN3 expression
US11021710B2 (en) 2018-05-09 2021-06-01 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing FXI expression
US11833168B2 (en) 2018-06-14 2023-12-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for increasing STMN2 expression
US11332746B1 (en) 2018-06-27 2022-05-17 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing LRRK2 expression
US11873495B2 (en) 2018-06-27 2024-01-16 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing LRRK2 expression
US11078486B2 (en) 2018-07-25 2021-08-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing ATXN2 expression
US11926825B2 (en) 2018-07-25 2024-03-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing ATXN2 expression
WO2020041348A1 (en) 2018-08-20 2020-02-27 Rogcon, Inc. Antisense oligonucleotides targeting scn2a for the treatment of scn1a encephalopathies
WO2020053142A1 (en) 2018-09-10 2020-03-19 Universidad Del País Vasco Novel target to treat a metabolic disease in an individual
EP3620520A1 (en) 2018-09-10 2020-03-11 Universidad del Pais Vasco Novel target to treat a metabolic disease in an individual
WO2020061200A1 (en) 2018-09-19 2020-03-26 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of pnpla3 expression
US11547718B2 (en) 2018-11-14 2023-01-10 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of FOXP3 expression
US11208650B2 (en) 2018-11-15 2021-12-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of IRF5 expression
WO2020106996A1 (en) 2018-11-21 2020-05-28 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing prion expression
US11214803B2 (en) 2019-01-31 2022-01-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of YAP1 expression
US11279932B2 (en) 2019-02-27 2022-03-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of MALAT1 expression
WO2020191177A1 (en) 2019-03-21 2020-09-24 Sudhir Agrawal Antisense oligonucleotides for allele specificity
WO2020205463A1 (en) 2019-03-29 2020-10-08 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating ube3a-ats
US12129466B2 (en) 2019-03-29 2024-10-29 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating UBE3A-ATS
US11261446B2 (en) 2019-03-29 2022-03-01 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating UBE3A-ATS
WO2020243292A1 (en) 2019-05-28 2020-12-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing fus expression
US11786546B2 (en) 2019-07-26 2023-10-17 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating GFAP
WO2021021673A1 (en) 2019-07-26 2021-02-04 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating gfap
WO2021074772A1 (en) 2019-10-14 2021-04-22 Astrazeneca Ab Modulators of pnpla3 expression
WO2021174019A1 (en) 2020-02-28 2021-09-02 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating smn2
US11299737B1 (en) 2020-02-28 2022-04-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating SMN2
US11542504B2 (en) 2020-05-01 2023-01-03 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating ATXN1
US11732263B2 (en) 2020-06-29 2023-08-22 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating PLP1
WO2022063782A1 (en) 2020-09-22 2022-03-31 Astrazeneca Ab Method of treating fatty liver disease
US11447521B2 (en) 2020-11-18 2022-09-20 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating angiotensinogen expression
WO2022122872A1 (en) 2020-12-09 2022-06-16 Ucl Business Ltd Therapeutics for the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders
US12018261B2 (en) 2020-12-18 2024-06-25 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for modulating factor XII
US11753644B2 (en) 2021-06-18 2023-09-12 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Compounds and methods for reducing IFNAR1 expression
WO2022271836A2 (en) 2021-06-22 2022-12-29 AcuraStem, Inc. Pikfyve antisense oligonucleotides
US12104159B2 (en) 2021-06-22 2024-10-01 AcuraStem Incorporated PIKFYVE antisense oligonucleotides
WO2023004049A1 (en) 2021-07-21 2023-01-26 AcuraStem, Inc. Unc13a antisense oligonucleotides
US11833221B2 (en) 2021-09-01 2023-12-05 Ionis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Oligomeric compounds for reducing DMPK expression
WO2023104964A1 (en) 2021-12-09 2023-06-15 Ucl Business Ltd Therapeutics for the treatment of neurodegenerative disorders
WO2023212625A1 (en) 2022-04-28 2023-11-02 AcuraStem Incorporated Syf2 antisense oligonucleotides
WO2024155986A2 (en) 2023-01-20 2024-07-25 AcuraStem Incorporated Unc13a antisense oligonucleotides
WO2024163651A2 (en) 2023-01-31 2024-08-08 AcuraStem Incorporated Syf2 antisense oligonucleotides
WO2024167945A1 (en) 2023-02-06 2024-08-15 AcuraStem Incorporated Pikfyve antisense oligonucleotides
WO2024220746A2 (en) 2023-04-21 2024-10-24 Flagship Pioneering Innovations Vii, Llc Rnai agents targeting fatty acid synthase and related methods

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2011017521A3 (en) 2011-05-12
EP2462153A2 (en) 2012-06-13
EP2462153B1 (en) 2015-07-29
WO2011017521A4 (en) 2011-07-07
US9012421B2 (en) 2015-04-21
WO2011017521A2 (en) 2011-02-10
US20120172414A1 (en) 2012-07-05

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9012421B2 (en) Bicyclic cyclohexose nucleic acid analogs
US9193752B2 (en) 5′-substituted bicyclic nucleosides and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
US9409934B2 (en) Cyclohexenyl nucleic acids analogs
US8501805B2 (en) Substituted alpha-L-bicyclic nucleosides
US8530640B2 (en) Bicyclic cyclohexitol nucleic acid analogs
US9290534B2 (en) Oligomeric compounds having at least one neutrally linked terminal bicyclic nucleoside
US8278283B2 (en) 6-disubstituted or unsaturated bicyclic nucleic acid analogs
EP2173760B1 (en) Carbocyclic bicyclic nucleic acid analogs
US8779118B2 (en) Base modified bicyclic nucleosides and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
US7666854B2 (en) Bis-modified bicyclic nucleic acid analogs
US8846637B2 (en) Substituted 2′-amino and 2′-thio-bicyclic nucleosides and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
EP2125852B1 (en) 5&#39;-substituted-2&#39;-f modified nucleosides and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
US9688707B2 (en) Bicyclic morpholino compounds and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
US9029335B2 (en) Substituted 2′-thio-bicyclic nucleosides and oligomeric compounds prepared therefrom
US8536320B2 (en) Tetrahydropyran nucleic acid analogs

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: IONIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:ISIS PHARMACEUTICALS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:037880/0189

Effective date: 20151218

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION